Make stap-probe.c:stap_parse_register_operand's "regname" an std::string
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set CSKY
25 @set H8300
26 @set HPPA
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set S/390
38 @set SPU
39 @set TICOFF
40 @set WIN32
41 @set XTENSA
42 @end ifset
43 @c man end
44
45 @ifnottex
46 @dircategory Software development
47 @direntry
48 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
49 @end direntry
50 @end ifnottex
51
52 @copying
53 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
56 @end ifset
57 version @value{VERSION}.
58
59 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
60
61 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
62 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
63 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
66 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
67 @end copying
68 @iftex
69 @finalout
70 @setchapternewpage odd
71 @settitle The GNU linker
72 @titlepage
73 @title The GNU linker
74 @sp 1
75 @subtitle @code{ld}
76 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
78 @end ifset
79 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80 @author Steve Chamberlain
81 @author Ian Lance Taylor
82 @page
83
84 @tex
85 {\parskip=0pt
86 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
88 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
89 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
90 }
91 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
92 @end tex
93
94 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
95 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
96 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
97
98 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
99 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
100 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
103 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
104 @c man end
105
106 @end titlepage
107 @end iftex
108 @contents
109 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
111 @ifnottex
112 @node Top
113 @top LD
114 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117 @end ifset
118 version @value{VERSION}.
119
120 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
121 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
123
124 @menu
125 * Overview:: Overview
126 * Invocation:: Invocation
127 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128 @ifset GENERIC
129 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130 @end ifset
131 @ifclear GENERIC
132 @ifset H8300
133 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134 @end ifset
135 @ifset Renesas
136 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
137 @end ifset
138 @ifset ARM
139 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
140 @end ifset
141 @ifset M68HC11
142 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
143 @end ifset
144 @ifset HPPA
145 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146 @end ifset
147 @ifset M68K
148 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
149 @end ifset
150 @ifset MIPS
151 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
152 @end ifset
153 @ifset POWERPC
154 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155 @end ifset
156 @ifset POWERPC64
157 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158 @end ifset
159 @ifset S/390
160 * S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
161 @end ifset
162 @ifset SPU
163 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
164 @end ifset
165 @ifset TICOFF
166 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
167 @end ifset
168 @ifset WIN32
169 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
170 @end ifset
171 @ifset XTENSA
172 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
173 @end ifset
174 @end ifclear
175 @ifclear SingleFormat
176 * BFD:: BFD
177 @end ifclear
178 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
179
180 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
181 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
182 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
183 * LD Index:: LD Index
184 @end menu
185 @end ifnottex
186
187 @node Overview
188 @chapter Overview
189
190 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
191 @cindex what is this?
192
193 @ifset man
194 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
195 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
196 @c man end
197
198 @c man begin SEEALSO
199 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
200 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
201 @file{ld}.
202 @c man end
203 @end ifset
204
205 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
206
207 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
208 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
209 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
210
211 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
212 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
213 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
214
215 @ifset man
216 @c For the man only
217 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
218 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
219 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
220 @end ifset
221
222 @ifclear SingleFormat
223 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
224 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
225 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
226 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
227 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
228 @end ifclear
229
230 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
231 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
232 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
233 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
234 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
235
236 @c man end
237
238 @node Invocation
239 @chapter Invocation
240
241 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
242
243 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
244 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
245 you have many choices to control its behavior.
246
247 @c man end
248
249 @ifset UsesEnvVars
250 @menu
251 * Options:: Command-line Options
252 * Environment:: Environment Variables
253 @end menu
254
255 @node Options
256 @section Command-line Options
257 @end ifset
258
259 @cindex command line
260 @cindex options
261
262 @c man begin OPTIONS
263
264 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
265 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
266 @cindex standard Unix system
267 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
268 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
269 link a file @code{hello.o}:
270
271 @smallexample
272 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
273 @end smallexample
274
275 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
276 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
277 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
278 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
279
280 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
281 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
282 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
283 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
284 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
285 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
286 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
287 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
288 noted in the descriptions below.
289
290 @cindex object files
291 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
292 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
293 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
294 an option and its argument.
295
296 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
297 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
298 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
299 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
300 message @samp{No input files}.
301
302 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
303 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
304 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
305 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
306 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
307 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
308 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
309 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
310 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
311 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
312 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
313
314 For options whose names are a single letter,
315 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
316 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
317 option that requires them.
318
319 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
320 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
321 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
322 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
323 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
324 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
325 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
326 output.
327
328 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
329 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
330 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
331 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
332 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
333 accepted.
334
335 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
336 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
337 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
338 compiler driver) like this:
339
340 @smallexample
341 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
342 @end smallexample
343
344 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
345 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
346 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
347 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
348 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
349 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
350 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
351
352 @smallexample
353 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
354 @end smallexample
355
356 Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
357 linker:
358
359 @table @gcctabopt
360 @include at-file.texi
361
362 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
363 @item -a @var{keyword}
364 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
365 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
366 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
367 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
368 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
369
370 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
373 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
374 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
375 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
376 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
377 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
378 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
379 interface.
380
381 @ifclear SingleFormat
382 @cindex binary input format
383 @kindex -b @var{format}
384 @kindex --format=@var{format}
385 @cindex input format
386 @cindex input format
387 @item -b @var{input-format}
388 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
389 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
390 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
391 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
392 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
393 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
394 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
395 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
396 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
397 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
398 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
399 @xref{BFD}.
400
401 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
402 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
403 linking object files of different formats), by including
404 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
405 particular format.
406
407 The default format is taken from the environment variable
408 @code{GNUTARGET}.
409 @ifset UsesEnvVars
410 @xref{Environment}.
411 @end ifset
412 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
413 @code{TARGET};
414 @ifclear man
415 see @ref{Format Commands}.
416 @end ifclear
417 @end ifclear
418
419 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
420 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
421 @cindex compatibility, MRI
422 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
423 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
424 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
425 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
426 @ifclear man
427 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
428 @end ifclear
429 @ifset man
430 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
431 @end ifset
432 Introduce MRI script files with
433 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
434 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
435 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
436 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
437
438 @cindex common allocation
439 @kindex -d
440 @kindex -dc
441 @kindex -dp
442 @item -d
443 @itemx -dc
444 @itemx -dp
445 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
446 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
447 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
448 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
449 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
450
451 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
452 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
453 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
454 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
455 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
456 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
457 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
458 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
459 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
460 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
461
462 @cindex entry point, from command line
463 @kindex -e @var{entry}
464 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
465 @item -e @var{entry}
466 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
467 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
468 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
469 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
470 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
471 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
472 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
473 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
474
475 @kindex --exclude-libs
476 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
477 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
478 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
479 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
480 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
481 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
482 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
483 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
484 be treated as hidden.
485
486 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
487 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
488 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
489 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
490 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
491 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
492 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
493 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
494 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
495 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
496 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
497 regardless of this option.
498
499 @cindex dynamic symbol table
500 @kindex -E
501 @kindex --export-dynamic
502 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
503 @item -E
504 @itemx --export-dynamic
505 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
506 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
507 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
508 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
509 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
510
511 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
512 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
513 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
514 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
515
516 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
517 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
518 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
519 linking the program itself.
520
521 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
522 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
523 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
524
525 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
526 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
527 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
528
529 @ifclear SingleFormat
530 @cindex big-endian objects
531 @cindex endianness
532 @kindex -EB
533 @item -EB
534 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
535
536 @cindex little-endian objects
537 @kindex -EL
538 @item -EL
539 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
540 @end ifclear
541
542 @kindex -f @var{name}
543 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
544 @item -f @var{name}
545 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
546 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
547 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
548 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
549 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
550
551 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
552 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
553 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
554 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
555 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
556 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
557 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
558 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
559 machine-specific performance.
560
561 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
562 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
563
564 @kindex -F @var{name}
565 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
566 @item -F @var{name}
567 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
568 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
569 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
570 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
571 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
572
573 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
574 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
575 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
576 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
577 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
578 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
579 @var{name}.
580
581 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
582 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
583 object files.
584 @ifclear SingleFormat
585 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
586 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
587 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
588 environment variable.
589 @end ifclear
590 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
591 creating an ELF shared object.
592
593 @cindex finalization function
594 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
595 @item -fini=@var{name}
596 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
597 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
598 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
599 the function to call.
600
601 @kindex -g
602 @item -g
603 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
604
605 @kindex -G @var{value}
606 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
607 @cindex object size
608 @item -G @var{value}
609 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
610 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
611 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
612 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
613 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
614
615 @cindex runtime library name
616 @kindex -h @var{name}
617 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
618 @item -h @var{name}
619 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
620 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
621 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
622 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
623 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
624 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
625
626 @kindex -i
627 @cindex incremental link
628 @item -i
629 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
630
631 @cindex initialization function
632 @kindex -init=@var{name}
633 @item -init=@var{name}
634 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
635 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
636 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
637 function to call.
638
639 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
640 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
641 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
642 @item -l @var{namespec}
643 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
644 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
645 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
646 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
647 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
648 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
649
650 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
651 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
652 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
653 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
654 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
655 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
656 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
657 @var{filename}.
658
659 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
660 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
661 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
662 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
663 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
664 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
665
666 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
667 archives multiple times.
668
669 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
670
671 @ifset GENERIC
672 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
673 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
674 behaviour of the AIX linker.
675 @end ifset
676
677 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
678 @kindex -L @var{dir}
679 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
680 @item -L @var{searchdir}
681 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
682 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
683 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
684 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
685 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
686 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
687 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
688 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
689 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
690 option is specified.
691
692 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
693 prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
694 @samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
695
696 @ifset UsesEnvVars
697 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
698 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
699 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
700 @end ifset
701
702 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
703 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
704 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
705
706 @cindex emulation
707 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
708 @item -m @var{emulation}
709 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
710 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
711
712 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
713 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
714
715 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
716 configured.
717
718 @cindex link map
719 @kindex -M
720 @kindex --print-map
721 @item -M
722 @itemx --print-map
723 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
724 information about the link, including the following:
725
726 @itemize @bullet
727 @item
728 Where object files are mapped into memory.
729 @item
730 How common symbols are allocated.
731 @item
732 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
733 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
734 @item
735 The values assigned to symbols.
736
737 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
738 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
739 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
740 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
741 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
742 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
743 linker script containing:
744
745 @smallexample
746 foo = 1
747 foo = foo * 4
748 foo = foo + 8
749 @end smallexample
750
751 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
752 option is used:
753
754 @smallexample
755 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
756 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
757 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
758 @end smallexample
759
760 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
761 scripts.
762
763 @item
764 How GNU properties are merged.
765
766 When the linker merges input .note.gnu.property sections into one output
767 .note.gnu.property section, some properties are removed or updated.
768 These actions are reported in the link map. For example:
769
770 @smallexample
771 Removed property 0xc0000002 to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (not found)
772 @end smallexample
773
774 This indicates that property 0xc0000002 is removed from output when
775 merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose property 0xc0000002 value
776 is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, which doesn't have property 0xc0000002.
777
778 @smallexample
779 Updated property 0xc0010001 (0x1) to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (0x1)
780 @end smallexample
781
782 This indicates that property 0xc0010001 value is updated to 0x1 in output
783 when merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value
784 is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value is 0x1.
785 @end itemize
786
787 @cindex link map discarded
788 @kindex --print-map-discarded
789 @kindex --no-print-map-discarded
790 @item --print-map-discarded
791 @itemx --no-print-map-discarded
792 Print (or do not print) the list of discarded and garbage collected sections
793 in the link map. Enabled by default.
794
795 @kindex -n
796 @cindex read-only text
797 @cindex NMAGIC
798 @kindex --nmagic
799 @item -n
800 @itemx --nmagic
801 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
802 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
803 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
804
805 @kindex -N
806 @kindex --omagic
807 @cindex read/write from cmd line
808 @cindex OMAGIC
809 @item -N
810 @itemx --omagic
811 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
812 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
813 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
814 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
815 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
816 specification published by Microsoft.
817
818 @kindex --no-omagic
819 @cindex OMAGIC
820 @item --no-omagic
821 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
822 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
823 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
824 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
825
826 @kindex -o @var{output}
827 @kindex --output=@var{output}
828 @cindex naming the output file
829 @item -o @var{output}
830 @itemx --output=@var{output}
831 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
832 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
833 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
834
835 @kindex -O @var{level}
836 @cindex generating optimized output
837 @item -O @var{level}
838 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
839 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
840 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
841 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
842 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
843 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
844 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
845
846 @kindex -plugin @var{name}
847 @item -plugin @var{name}
848 Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
849 the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
850 automatically added by the complier, when using link time
851 optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
852 wish.
853
854 Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
855 from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
856 @command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
857 those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
858 copied into the @file{$@{bindir@}/../lib/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
859 based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
860 just copy in the newest one.
861
862 @kindex --push-state
863 @cindex push state governing input file handling
864 @item --push-state
865 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
866 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
867 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
868
869 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
870 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
871 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
872 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
873 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
874 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
875
876 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
877 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
878 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
879 something as follows:
880
881 @smallexample
882 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
883 @end smallexample
884
885 @kindex --pop-state
886 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
887 @item --pop-state
888 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
889 flags governing input file handling.
890
891 @kindex -q
892 @kindex --emit-relocs
893 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
894 @item -q
895 @itemx --emit-relocs
896 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
897 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
898 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
899 in larger executables.
900
901 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
902
903 @kindex --force-dynamic
904 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
905 @item --force-dynamic
906 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
907 to VxWorks targets.
908
909 @cindex partial link
910 @cindex relocatable output
911 @kindex -r
912 @kindex --relocatable
913 @item -r
914 @itemx --relocatable
915 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
916 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
917 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
918 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
919 @code{OMAGIC}.
920 @c ; see @option{-N}.
921 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
922 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
923 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
924
925 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
926 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
927 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
928 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
929 with input files in other formats at all.
930
931 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
932
933 @kindex -R @var{file}
934 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
935 @cindex symbol-only input
936 @item -R @var{filename}
937 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
938 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
939 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
940 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
941 programs. You may use this option more than once.
942
943 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
944 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
945 the @option{-rpath} option.
946
947 @kindex -s
948 @kindex --strip-all
949 @cindex strip all symbols
950 @item -s
951 @itemx --strip-all
952 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
953
954 @kindex -S
955 @kindex --strip-debug
956 @cindex strip debugger symbols
957 @item -S
958 @itemx --strip-debug
959 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
960
961 @kindex --strip-discarded
962 @kindex --no-strip-discarded
963 @item --strip-discarded
964 @itemx --no-strip-discarded
965 Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
966 Enabled by default.
967
968 @kindex -t
969 @kindex --trace
970 @cindex input files, displaying
971 @item -t
972 @itemx --trace
973 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them. If
974 @samp{-t} is given twice then members within archives are also printed.
975 @samp{-t} output is useful to generate a list of all the object files
976 and scripts involved in linking, for example, when packaging files for
977 a linker bug report.
978
979 @kindex -T @var{script}
980 @kindex --script=@var{script}
981 @cindex script files
982 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
983 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
984 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
985 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
986 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
987 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
988 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
989 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
990 options accumulate.
991
992 @kindex -dT @var{script}
993 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
994 @cindex script files
995 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
996 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
997 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
998
999 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
1000 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
1001 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
1002 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
1003 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
1004 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
1005 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
1006 @samp{gcc}).
1007
1008 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
1009 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
1010 @cindex undefined symbol
1011 @item -u @var{symbol}
1012 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
1013 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
1014 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1015 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1016 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1017 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1018
1019 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1020 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1021 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1022 instead.
1023
1024 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1025 @cindex symbols, require defined
1026 @cindex defined symbol
1027 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1028 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1029 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1030 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1031 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1032 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1033 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1034
1035 @kindex -Ur
1036 @cindex constructors
1037 @item -Ur
1038 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1039 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
1040 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
1041 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1042 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1043 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1044 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1045 @samp{-r} for the others.
1046
1047 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1048 @cindex orphan sections
1049 @cindex sections, orphan
1050 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1051 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1052 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1053
1054 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1055
1056 @table @code
1057 @item place
1058 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1059 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1060 @samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
1061
1062 @item discard
1063 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1064 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1065
1066 @item warn
1067 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1068 issue a warning.
1069
1070 @item error
1071 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1072 @end table
1073
1074 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1075
1076 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1077 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1078 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1079 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1080 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1081 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1082 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1083 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1084 in a linker script.
1085
1086 @kindex -v
1087 @kindex -V
1088 @kindex --version
1089 @cindex version
1090 @item -v
1091 @itemx --version
1092 @itemx -V
1093 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1094 lists the supported emulations.
1095
1096 @kindex -x
1097 @kindex --discard-all
1098 @cindex deleting local symbols
1099 @item -x
1100 @itemx --discard-all
1101 Delete all local symbols.
1102
1103 @kindex -X
1104 @kindex --discard-locals
1105 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1106 @item -X
1107 @itemx --discard-locals
1108 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1109 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1110 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1111
1112 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1113 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1114 @cindex symbol tracing
1115 @item -y @var{symbol}
1116 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1117 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1118 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1119 to prepend an underscore.
1120
1121 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1122 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1123
1124 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1125 @item -Y @var{path}
1126 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1127 for Solaris compatibility.
1128
1129 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1130 @item -z @var{keyword}
1131 The recognized keywords are:
1132 @table @samp
1133
1134 @item bndplt
1135 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1136
1137 @item call-nop=prefix-addr
1138 @itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1139 @itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1140 @itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1141 Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1142 to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1143 @option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1144 @option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1145 @option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1146 @option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1147 Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1148
1149 @item cet-report=none
1150 @itemx cet-report=warning
1151 @itemx cet-report=error
1152 Specify how to report the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT and
1153 GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK properties in input .note.gnu.property
1154 section. @option{cet-report=none}, which is the default, will make the
1155 linker not report missing properties in input files.
1156 @option{cet-report=warning} will make the linker issue a warning for
1157 missing properties in input files. @option{cet-report=error} will make
1158 the linker issue an error for missing properties in input files.
1159 Note that @option{ibt} will turn off the missing
1160 GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT property report and @option{shstk} will
1161 turn off the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK property report.
1162 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1163
1164 @item combreloc
1165 @itemx nocombreloc
1166 Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1167 dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
1168
1169 @item common
1170 @itemx nocommon
1171 Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1172 link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1173
1174 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1175 Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1176 layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1177 using pages of this size.
1178
1179 @item defs
1180 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1181 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1182 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
1183
1184 @item dynamic-undefined-weak
1185 @itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1186 Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1187 if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1188 by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1189 @samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1190 may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1191 selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1192 these options.
1193
1194 @item execstack
1195 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1196
1197 @item global
1198 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1199 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1200 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1201
1202 @item globalaudit
1203 This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1204 This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1205 setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1206 tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
1207 the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
1208 all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
1209
1210 @item ibtplt
1211 Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1212 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1213
1214 @item ibt
1215 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1216 to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1217 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1218
1219 @item initfirst
1220 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1221 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1222 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1223 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1224 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1225 objects.
1226
1227 @item interpose
1228 Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1229 so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1230 libraries not so marked.
1231
1232 @item lazy
1233 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1234 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1235 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1236 Lazy binding is the default.
1237
1238 @item loadfltr
1239 Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
1240
1241 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1242 Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
1243
1244 @item muldefs
1245 Allow multiple definitions.
1246
1247 @item nocopyreloc
1248 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1249 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1250
1251 @item nodefaultlib
1252 Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1253 should ignore any default library search paths.
1254
1255 @item nodelete
1256 Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1257
1258 @item nodlopen
1259 Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
1260
1261 @item nodump
1262 Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1263
1264 @item noexecstack
1265 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1266
1267 @item noextern-protected-data
1268 Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1269 library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1270 used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1271 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1272 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1273 i386 and x86-64.
1274
1275 @item noreloc-overflow
1276 Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1277 relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1278 overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1279
1280 @item now
1281 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1282 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1283 when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1284 function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1285 called.
1286
1287 @item origin
1288 Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
1289
1290 @item relro
1291 @itemx norelro
1292 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1293 specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1294 relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1295 than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
1296 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
1297
1298 @item separate-code
1299 @itemx noseparate-code
1300 Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1301 specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1302 be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1303 code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1304
1305 @item shstk
1306 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1307 to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1308 Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1309
1310 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1311 Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1312 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1313 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1314
1315 @item text
1316 @itemx notext
1317 @itemx textoff
1318 Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1319 relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1320 @samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
1321
1322 @item undefs
1323 Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1324 either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1325 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1326
1327 @end table
1328
1329 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1330
1331 @kindex -(
1332 @cindex groups of archives
1333 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1334 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1335 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1336 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1337
1338 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1339 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1340 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1341 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1342 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1343 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1344 they will all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1345 resolved.
1346
1347 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1348 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1349 more archives.
1350
1351 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1352 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1353 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1354 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1355 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1356 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1357 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1358 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1359 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1360 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1361 restore the old behaviour.
1362
1363 @kindex --as-needed
1364 @kindex --no-as-needed
1365 @item --as-needed
1366 @itemx --no-as-needed
1367 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1368 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1369 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1370 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1371 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1372 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1373 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1374 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1375 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1376 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1377 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1378 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1379 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1380
1381 @kindex --add-needed
1382 @kindex --no-add-needed
1383 @item --add-needed
1384 @itemx --no-add-needed
1385 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1386 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1387 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1388 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1389
1390 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1391 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1392 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1393
1394 @kindex -Bdynamic
1395 @kindex -dy
1396 @kindex -call_shared
1397 @item -Bdynamic
1398 @itemx -dy
1399 @itemx -call_shared
1400 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1401 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1402 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1403 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1404 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1405 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1406
1407 @kindex -Bgroup
1408 @item -Bgroup
1409 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1410 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1411 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1412 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1413 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1414
1415 @kindex -Bstatic
1416 @kindex -dn
1417 @kindex -non_shared
1418 @kindex -static
1419 @item -Bstatic
1420 @itemx -dn
1421 @itemx -non_shared
1422 @itemx -static
1423 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1424 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1425 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1426 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1427 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1428 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1429 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1430 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1431 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1432 libraries.
1433
1434 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1435 @item -Bsymbolic
1436 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1437 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1438 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1439 within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1440 @option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1441 executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1442 the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1443 support shared libraries and position independent executables.
1444
1445 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1446 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1447 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1448 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1449 This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1450 when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1451 to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
1452 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1453 libraries and position independent executables.
1454
1455 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1456 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1457 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1458 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1459 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1460 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1461 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1462 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1463 which support shared libraries.
1464
1465 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1466 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1467
1468 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1469 @item --dynamic-list-data
1470 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1471
1472 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1473 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1474 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1475 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1476
1477 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1478 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1479 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1480
1481 @kindex --check-sections
1482 @kindex --no-check-sections
1483 @item --check-sections
1484 @itemx --no-check-sections
1485 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1486 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1487 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1488 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1489 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1490 restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1491 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1492 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1493 option.
1494
1495 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1496 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1497 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1498 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1499 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1500 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1501 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1502 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1503 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1504 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1505 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1506 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1507
1508 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1509 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1510 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1511 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1512 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1513 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1514 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1515 symbols.
1516
1517 @cindex cross reference table
1518 @kindex --cref
1519 @item --cref
1520 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1521 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1522 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1523
1524 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1525 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1526 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1527 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1528 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1529 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1530 symbol are listed.
1531
1532 @cindex common allocation
1533 @kindex --no-define-common
1534 @item --no-define-common
1535 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1536 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1537 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1538
1539 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1540 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1541 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1542 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1543 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1544 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1545 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1546 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1547 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1548 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1549
1550 @cindex group allocation in linker script
1551 @cindex section groups
1552 @cindex COMDAT
1553 @kindex --force-group-allocation
1554 @item --force-group-allocation
1555 This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1556 normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1557 default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1558 change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1559 command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1560 effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1561
1562 @cindex symbols, from command line
1563 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1564 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1565 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1566 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1567 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1568 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1569 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1570 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1571 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1572 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1573 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1574 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1575
1576 @cindex demangling, from command line
1577 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1578 @kindex --no-demangle
1579 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1580 @itemx --no-demangle
1581 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1582 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1583 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1584 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1585 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1586 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1587 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1588 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1589 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1590
1591 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1592 @kindex -I@var{file}
1593 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1594 @item -I@var{file}
1595 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1596 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1597 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1598 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1599 doing.
1600
1601 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1602 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1603 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1604 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1605 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1606 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1607
1608 @kindex --embedded-relocs
1609 @item --embedded-relocs
1610 This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1611 that the relocs are stored in a target-specific section. This option
1612 is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1613 targets.
1614
1615 @kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1616 @item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1617 Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1618 in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1619
1620 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1621 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1622 @item --fatal-warnings
1623 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1624 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1625 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1626
1627 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1628 @item --force-exe-suffix
1629 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1630
1631 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1632 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1633 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1634 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1635 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1636 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1637
1638 @kindex --gc-sections
1639 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1640 @cindex garbage collection
1641 @item --gc-sections
1642 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1643 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1644 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1645 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1646 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1647 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1648 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1649
1650 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1651 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1652 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1653 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1654 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1655 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1656 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1657 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1658 relocations. See @samp{--entry}, @samp{--undefined}, and
1659 @samp{--gc-keep-exported}.
1660
1661 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1662 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1663 specified either by one of the options @samp{--entry},
1664 @samp{--undefined}, or @samp{--gc-keep-exported} or by a @code{ENTRY}
1665 command in the linker script.
1666
1667 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1668 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1669 @cindex garbage collection
1670 @item --print-gc-sections
1671 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1672 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1673 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1674 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1675 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1676 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1677 line.
1678
1679 @kindex --gc-keep-exported
1680 @cindex garbage collection
1681 @item --gc-keep-exported
1682 When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1683 collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1684 default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1685 executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1686 collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1687 Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1688 it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1689 ELF format targets.
1690
1691 @kindex --print-output-format
1692 @cindex output format
1693 @item --print-output-format
1694 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1695 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1696 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1697
1698 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1699 @cindex memory usage
1700 @item --print-memory-usage
1701 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1702 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1703 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1704 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1705 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1706
1707 @smallexample
1708 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1709 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1710 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1711 @end smallexample
1712
1713 @cindex help
1714 @cindex usage
1715 @kindex --help
1716 @item --help
1717 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1718
1719 @kindex --target-help
1720 @item --target-help
1721 Print a summary of all target-specific options on the standard output and exit.
1722
1723 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1724 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1725 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1726 @option{-M} option, above.
1727
1728 @cindex memory usage
1729 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1730 @item --no-keep-memory
1731 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1732 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1733 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1734 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1735 while linking a large executable.
1736
1737 @kindex --no-undefined
1738 @kindex -z defs
1739 @kindex -z undefs
1740 @item --no-undefined
1741 @itemx -z defs
1742 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1743 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1744 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1745 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1746 libraries being linked in.
1747
1748 The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1749
1750 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1751 @kindex -z muldefs
1752 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1753 @itemx -z muldefs
1754 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1755 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1756 first definition will be used.
1757
1758 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1759 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1760 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1761 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1762 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1763 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1764 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1765 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1766 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1767
1768 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1769 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1770 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1771 a shared library.
1772
1773 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1774 libraries specified at link time are that:
1775
1776 @itemize @bullet
1777 @item
1778 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1779 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1780 resolvable at load time.
1781 @item
1782 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1783 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1784
1785 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1786 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1787 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1788 appropriate memset function.
1789 @end itemize
1790
1791 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1792 @item --no-undefined-version
1793 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1794 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1795 will be issued instead.
1796
1797 @kindex --default-symver
1798 @item --default-symver
1799 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1800 exported symbols.
1801
1802 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1803 @item --default-imported-symver
1804 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1805 imported symbols.
1806
1807 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1808 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1809 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1810 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1811 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1812 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1813 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1814 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1815 inappropriate.
1816
1817 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1818 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1819 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1820 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1821
1822 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1823 @item --no-whole-archive
1824 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1825 archive files.
1826
1827 @cindex output file after errors
1828 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1829 @item --noinhibit-exec
1830 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1831 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1832 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1833 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1834
1835 @kindex -nostdlib
1836 @item -nostdlib
1837 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1838 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1839 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1840
1841 @ifclear SingleFormat
1842 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1843 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1844 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1845 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1846 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1847 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1848 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1849 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1850 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1851 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1852 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1853 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1854 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1855 @end ifclear
1856
1857 @kindex --out-implib
1858 @item --out-implib @var{file}
1859 Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1860 the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1861 library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1862 may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1863 behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1864 step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1865 the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1866
1867 @kindex -pie
1868 @kindex --pic-executable
1869 @item -pie
1870 @itemx --pic-executable
1871 @cindex position independent executables
1872 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1873 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1874 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1875 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1876 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1877 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1878
1879 @kindex -qmagic
1880 @item -qmagic
1881 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1882
1883 @kindex -Qy
1884 @item -Qy
1885 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1886
1887 @kindex --relax
1888 @cindex synthesizing linker
1889 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1890 @cindex --no-relax
1891 @item --relax
1892 @itemx --no-relax
1893 An option with machine dependent effects.
1894 @ifset GENERIC
1895 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1896 @end ifset
1897 @ifset H8300
1898 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1899 @end ifset
1900 @ifset XTENSA
1901 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1902 @end ifset
1903 @ifset M68HC11
1904 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1905 @end ifset
1906 @ifset NIOSII
1907 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1908 @end ifset
1909 @ifset POWERPC
1910 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1911 @end ifset
1912
1913 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target-specific,
1914 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1915 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1916 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1917 instructions, and combining constant values.
1918
1919 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1920 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1921 @ifset GENERIC
1922 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1923 family of processors.
1924 @end ifset
1925
1926 @ifset GENERIC
1927 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1928 but ignored.
1929 @end ifset
1930
1931 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1932 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1933
1934 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1935 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1936 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1937 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1938 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1939 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1940 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1941 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1942 @ifset GENERIC
1943 (such as VxWorks)
1944 @end ifset
1945 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1946 run-time memory.
1947
1948 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1949 or symbols needed for relocations.
1950
1951 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1952 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1953
1954 @ifset GENERIC
1955 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1956 @cindex runtime library search path
1957 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1958 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1959 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1960 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1961 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1962 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1963 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1964 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1965 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1966 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1967
1968 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1969 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
1970 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1971 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1972 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1973 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1974 file systems.
1975
1976 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1977 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1978 the @option{-rpath} option.
1979 @end ifset
1980
1981 @ifset GENERIC
1982 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1983 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1984 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1985 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1986 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1987 of the input files.
1988
1989 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1990 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1991 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1992 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1993 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1994 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1995 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1996 appearing multiple times.
1997
1998 The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1999 directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
2000 containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
2001 and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
2002 64-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
2003
2004 The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
2005 @var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
2006 supported.
2007
2008 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
2009 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
2010 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
2011 runtime linker would do.
2012
2013 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
2014 libraries:
2015 @enumerate
2016 @item
2017 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
2018 @item
2019 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
2020 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
2021 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
2022 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
2023 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
2024 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
2025 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
2026 @item
2027 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
2028 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
2029 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
2030 @item
2031 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
2032 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
2033 @item
2034 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
2035 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
2036 @item
2037 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
2038 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
2039 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
2040 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
2041 @item
2042 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
2043 @item
2044 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2045 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
2046 @end enumerate
2047
2048 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2049 warning and continue with the link.
2050 @end ifset
2051
2052 @kindex -shared
2053 @kindex -Bshareable
2054 @item -shared
2055 @itemx -Bshareable
2056 @cindex shared libraries
2057 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2058 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
2059 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
2060 undefined symbols in the link.
2061
2062 @kindex --sort-common
2063 @item --sort-common
2064 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
2065 @itemx --sort-common=descending
2066 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2067 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2068 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2069 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2070 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2071 specified, then descending order is assumed.
2072
2073 @kindex --sort-section=name
2074 @item --sort-section=name
2075 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2076 patterns in the linker script.
2077
2078 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
2079 @item --sort-section=alignment
2080 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2081 patterns in the linker script.
2082
2083 @kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2084 @item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2085 This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2086 .dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2087 post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2088
2089 @kindex --split-by-file
2090 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
2091 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
2092 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2093 size of 1 if not given.
2094
2095 @kindex --split-by-reloc
2096 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
2097 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
2098 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
2099 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
2100 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2101 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2102 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2103 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2104 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2105 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
2106 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
2107
2108 @kindex --stats
2109 @item --stats
2110 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2111 as execution time and memory usage.
2112
2113 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
2114 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2115 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2116 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2117 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2118
2119 @kindex --task-link
2120 @item --task-link
2121 This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2122 file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2123
2124 @kindex --traditional-format
2125 @cindex traditional format
2126 @item --traditional-format
2127 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2128 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
2129 use the traditional format instead.
2130
2131 @cindex dbx
2132 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
2133 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2134 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2135 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
2136 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
2137 combine duplicate entries.
2138
2139 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2140 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2141 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2142 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2143 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2144 line.
2145 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2146 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2147 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2148 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2149 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2150
2151 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2152 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2153 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
2154 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
2155 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
2156 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2157 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2158 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
2159 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
2160
2161 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2162 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2163 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2164 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2165 byte of the text segment.
2166
2167 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2168 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2169 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2170 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2171 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2172 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2173
2174 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2175 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2176 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2177 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2178 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2179
2180 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
2181 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2182 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2183 values for @samp{method}:
2184
2185 @table @samp
2186 @item ignore-all
2187 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2188
2189 @item report-all
2190 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2191
2192 @item ignore-in-object-files
2193 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2194 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2195
2196 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
2197 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2198 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2199 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2200 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2201 command line.
2202 @end table
2203
2204 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2205 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2206
2207 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2208 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2209 can change this to a warning.
2210
2211 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2212 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2213 @item --dll-verbose
2214 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2215 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2216 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2217 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2218 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2219
2220 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2221 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2222 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2223 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2224 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2225 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2226 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2227 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2228 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2229 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2230 @xref{WIN32}.
2231
2232 @kindex --warn-common
2233 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2234 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2235 @item --warn-common
2236 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2237 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2238 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2239 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2240 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2241 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2242
2243 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2244
2245 @table @samp
2246 @item int i = 1;
2247 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2248 file.
2249
2250 @item extern int i;
2251 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2252 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2253 variable somewhere.
2254
2255 @item int i;
2256 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2257 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2258 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2259 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2260 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2261 a definition of the same variable.
2262 @end table
2263
2264 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2265 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2266 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2267 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2268 a common symbol.
2269
2270 @enumerate
2271 @item
2272 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2273 definition for the symbol.
2274 @smallexample
2275 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2276 overridden by definition
2277 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2278 @end smallexample
2279
2280 @item
2281 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2282 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2283 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2284 @smallexample
2285 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2286 overriding common
2287 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2288 @end smallexample
2289
2290 @item
2291 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2292 @smallexample
2293 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2294 of `@var{symbol}'
2295 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2296 @end smallexample
2297
2298 @item
2299 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2300 @smallexample
2301 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2302 overridden by larger common
2303 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2304 @end smallexample
2305
2306 @item
2307 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2308 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2309 encountered in a different order.
2310 @smallexample
2311 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2312 overriding smaller common
2313 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2314 @end smallexample
2315 @end enumerate
2316
2317 @kindex --warn-constructors
2318 @item --warn-constructors
2319 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2320 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2321 detect the use of global constructors.
2322
2323 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2324 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2325 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2326 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2327 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2328 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2329 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2330 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2331 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2332 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2333 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2334 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2335 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2336
2337 @kindex --warn-once
2338 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2339 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2340 @item --warn-once
2341 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2342 which refers to it.
2343
2344 @kindex --warn-section-align
2345 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2346 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2347 @item --warn-section-align
2348 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2349 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2350 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2351 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2352 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2353
2354 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2355 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2356 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2357
2358 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2359 @item --warn-alternate-em
2360 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2361
2362 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2363 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2364 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2365 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2366 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2367
2368 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2369 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2370 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2371 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2372
2373 @kindex --whole-archive
2374 @cindex including an entire archive
2375 @item --whole-archive
2376 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2377 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2378 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2379 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2380 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2381 library. This option may be used more than once.
2382
2383 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2384 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2385 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2386 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2387 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2388
2389 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2390 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2391 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2392 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2393 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2394 @var{symbol}.
2395
2396 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2397 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2398 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2399 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2400
2401 Here is a trivial example:
2402
2403 @smallexample
2404 void *
2405 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2406 @{
2407 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2408 return __real_malloc (c);
2409 @}
2410 @end smallexample
2411
2412 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2413 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2414 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2415 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2416
2417 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2418 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2419 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2420 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2421 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2422
2423 Only undefined references are replaced by the linker. So, translation unit
2424 internal references to @var{symbol} are not resolved to
2425 @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. In the next example, the call to @code{f} in
2426 @code{g} is not resolved to @code{__wrap_f}.
2427
2428 @smallexample
2429 int
2430 f (void)
2431 @{
2432 return 123;
2433 @}
2434
2435 int
2436 g (void)
2437 @{
2438 return f();
2439 @}
2440 @end smallexample
2441
2442 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2443 @kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
2444 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2445 @itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2446 Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2447 (@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2448 section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2449
2450 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2451 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2452 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2453 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2454 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2455
2456 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2457 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2458 @item --enable-new-dtags
2459 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2460 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2461 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2462 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2463 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2464 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2465 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2466 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2467
2468 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2469 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2470 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2471 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2472 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2473 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2474 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2475
2476 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2477 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2478 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2479 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2480 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2481 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2482 hash tables. The default depends upon how the linker was configured,
2483 but for most Linux based systems it will be @code{both}.
2484
2485 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2486 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2487 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2488 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2489 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2490 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2491 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2492 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2493 On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2494 compressed using zlib.
2495
2496 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2497 sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2498 DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2499 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2500 also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2501 sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2502
2503 The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2504 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2505
2506 Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2507 sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2508 for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2509 uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2510
2511 The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2512 involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2513 default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2514 @option{--help} option.
2515
2516 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2517 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2518 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2519 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2520 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2521 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2522
2523 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2524 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2525 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2526 has been used.
2527
2528 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2529 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2530
2531 @kindex --build-id
2532 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2533 @item --build-id
2534 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2535 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2536 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2537 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2538 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2539 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2540 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2541 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2542 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2543 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2544 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2545
2546 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2547 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2548 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2549 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2550 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2551 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2552
2553 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2554 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2555 @end table
2556
2557 @c man end
2558
2559 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2560
2561 @c man begin OPTIONS
2562
2563 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2564 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2565 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2566 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2567 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2568 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2569 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2570 object file).
2571
2572 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2573 support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
2574 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2575 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2576
2577 @table @gcctabopt
2578
2579 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2580 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2581 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2582 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2583 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2584
2585 @kindex --base-file
2586 @item --base-file @var{file}
2587 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2588 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2589 @file{dlltool}.
2590 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2591
2592 @kindex --dll
2593 @item --dll
2594 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2595 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2596 file.
2597 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2598
2599 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2600 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2601 @item --enable-long-section-names
2602 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2603 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2604 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2605 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2606 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2607 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2608 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2609 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2610 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2611 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2612 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2613 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2614 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2615 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2616 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2617 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2618 image and not stripping symbols.
2619 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2620
2621 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2622 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2623 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2624 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2625 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2626 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2627 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2628 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2629 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2630 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2631 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2632 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2633 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2634 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2635 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2636 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2637 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2638 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2639
2640 @kindex --leading-underscore
2641 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2642 @item --leading-underscore
2643 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2644 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2645 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2646 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2647
2648 @cindex DLLs, creating
2649 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2650 @item --export-all-symbols
2651 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2652 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2653 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2654 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2655 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2656 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2657 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2658 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2659 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2660 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2661 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2662 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2663 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2664 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2665 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2666 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2667 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2668 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2669 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2670 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2671 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2672 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2673 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2674
2675 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2676 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2677 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2678 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2679 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2680
2681 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2682 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2683 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2684 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2685
2686 @kindex --file-alignment
2687 @item --file-alignment
2688 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2689 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2690 512.
2691 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2692
2693 @cindex heap size
2694 @kindex --heap
2695 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2696 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2697 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2698 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2699 committed.
2700 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2701
2702 @cindex image base
2703 @kindex --image-base
2704 @item --image-base @var{value}
2705 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2706 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2707 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2708 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2709 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2710 for dlls.
2711 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2712
2713 @kindex --kill-at
2714 @item --kill-at
2715 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2716 symbols before they are exported.
2717 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2718
2719 @kindex --large-address-aware
2720 @item --large-address-aware
2721 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2722 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2723 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2724 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2725 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2726 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2727
2728 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2729 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2730 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2731 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2732 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2733 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2734 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2735
2736 @kindex --major-image-version
2737 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2738 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2739 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2740
2741 @kindex --major-os-version
2742 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2743 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2744 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2745
2746 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2747 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2748 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2749 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2750
2751 @kindex --minor-image-version
2752 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2753 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2754 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2755
2756 @kindex --minor-os-version
2757 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2758 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2759 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2760
2761 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2762 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2763 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2764 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2765
2766 @cindex DEF files, creating
2767 @cindex DLLs, creating
2768 @kindex --output-def
2769 @item --output-def @var{file}
2770 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2771 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2772 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2773 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2774 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2775 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2776
2777 @cindex DLLs, creating
2778 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2779 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2780 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2781 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2782 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2783 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2784 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2785 execution are avoided.
2786 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2787
2788 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2789 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2790 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2791 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2792 default.
2793 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2794
2795 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2796 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2797 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2798 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2799 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2800 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2801 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2802 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2803 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2804 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2805
2806 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2807 @item --enable-auto-import
2808 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2809 DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2810 mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2811 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2812
2813 The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2814 feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2815
2816 Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2817 of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2818 PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
2819
2820 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2821 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2822 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2823 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2824 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2825
2826 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2827 see this message:
2828
2829 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2830 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2831
2832 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2833 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2834 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2835 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2836 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2837 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2838 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2839 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2840 the warning, and exit.
2841
2842 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2843 data type of the exported variable:
2844
2845 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2846 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2847 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2848
2849 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2850 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2851 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2852 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2853
2854 @example
2855 extern type extern_array[];
2856 extern_array[1] -->
2857 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2858 @end example
2859
2860 or
2861
2862 @example
2863 extern type extern_array[];
2864 extern_array[1] -->
2865 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2866 @end example
2867
2868 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2869 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2870
2871 @example
2872 extern struct s extern_struct;
2873 extern_struct.field -->
2874 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2875 @end example
2876
2877 or
2878
2879 @example
2880 extern long long extern_ll;
2881 extern_ll -->
2882 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2883 @end example
2884
2885 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2886 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2887 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2888 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2889 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2890 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2891 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2892 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2893
2894 Original:
2895 @example
2896 --foo.h
2897 extern int arr[];
2898 --foo.c
2899 #include "foo.h"
2900 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2901 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2902 @}
2903 @end example
2904
2905 Solution 1:
2906 @example
2907 --foo.h
2908 extern int arr[];
2909 --foo.c
2910 #include "foo.h"
2911 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2912 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2913 volatile int *parr = arr;
2914 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2915 @}
2916 @end example
2917
2918 Solution 2:
2919 @example
2920 --foo.h
2921 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2922 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2923 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2924 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2925 #else
2926 #define FOO_IMPORT
2927 #endif
2928 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2929 --foo.c
2930 #include "foo.h"
2931 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2932 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2933 @}
2934 @end example
2935
2936 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2937 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2938 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2939 functions).
2940
2941 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2942 @item --disable-auto-import
2943 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2944 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2945 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2946
2947 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2948 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2949 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2950 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2951 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2952 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2953 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2954
2955 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2956 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2957 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
2958 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2959
2960 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2961 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2962 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2963 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2964
2965 @kindex --section-alignment
2966 @item --section-alignment
2967 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2968 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2969 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2970
2971 @cindex stack size
2972 @kindex --stack
2973 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2974 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2975 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2976 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2977 committed.
2978 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2979
2980 @kindex --subsystem
2981 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2982 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2983 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2984 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2985 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2986 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2987 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2988 @var{which}.
2989 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2990
2991 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2992 of the PE file header:
2993 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2994
2995 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2996 @item --high-entropy-va
2997 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2998 (ASLR).
2999
3000 @kindex --dynamicbase
3001 @item --dynamicbase
3002 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
3003 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
3004 Vista for i386 PE targets.
3005
3006 @kindex --forceinteg
3007 @item --forceinteg
3008 Code integrity checks are enforced.
3009
3010 @kindex --nxcompat
3011 @item --nxcompat
3012 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
3013 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
3014
3015 @kindex --no-isolation
3016 @item --no-isolation
3017 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
3018
3019 @kindex --no-seh
3020 @item --no-seh
3021 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
3022 this image.
3023
3024 @kindex --no-bind
3025 @item --no-bind
3026 Do not bind this image.
3027
3028 @kindex --wdmdriver
3029 @item --wdmdriver
3030 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
3031
3032 @kindex --tsaware
3033 @item --tsaware
3034 The image is Terminal Server aware.
3035
3036 @kindex --insert-timestamp
3037 @item --insert-timestamp
3038 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
3039 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
3040 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
3041 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
3042 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
3043 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
3044 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
3045 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
3046 identically.
3047 @end table
3048
3049 @c man end
3050
3051 @ifset C6X
3052 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
3053
3054 @c man begin OPTIONS
3055
3056 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
3057 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
3058 all executables use an index of 0.
3059
3060 @table @gcctabopt
3061
3062 @kindex --dsbt-size
3063 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
3064 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
3065 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
3066 entries.
3067
3068 @kindex --dsbt-index
3069 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3070 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3071 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3072 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3073 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3074
3075 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3076 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3077 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3078
3079 @end table
3080
3081 @c man end
3082 @end ifset
3083
3084 @ifset CSKY
3085 @subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3086
3087 @c man begin OPTIONS
3088
3089 @table @gcctabopt
3090
3091 @kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3092 @item --branch-stub
3093 This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3094 sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3095 usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3096 can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3097 the compiler or assembler.
3098
3099 @kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3100 @item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3101 This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3102 It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3103 be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3104 stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3105 sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3106 @samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3107 linker should choose suitable defaults.
3108
3109 @end table
3110
3111 @c man end
3112 @end ifset
3113
3114 @ifset M68HC11
3115 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3116
3117 @c man begin OPTIONS
3118
3119 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3120 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3121
3122 @table @gcctabopt
3123
3124 @kindex --no-trampoline
3125 @item --no-trampoline
3126 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3127 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3128 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3129
3130 @kindex --bank-window
3131 @item --bank-window @var{name}
3132 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3133 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3134 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3135 paging and addresses within the memory window.
3136
3137 @end table
3138
3139 @c man end
3140 @end ifset
3141
3142 @ifset M68K
3143 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3144
3145 @c man begin OPTIONS
3146
3147 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3148 when linking for 68K targets.
3149
3150 @table @gcctabopt
3151
3152 @kindex --got
3153 @item --got=@var{type}
3154 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3155 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3156 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3157 Info entry for @file{ld}.
3158
3159 @end table
3160
3161 @c man end
3162 @end ifset
3163
3164 @ifset MIPS
3165 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3166
3167 @c man begin OPTIONS
3168
3169 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
3170 generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3171 linking for MIPS targets.
3172
3173 @table @gcctabopt
3174
3175 @kindex --insn32
3176 @item --insn32
3177 @kindex --no-insn32
3178 @itemx --no-insn32
3179 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3180 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3181 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
3182 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3183 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3184 possible.
3185
3186 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3187 @item --ignore-branch-isa
3188 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3189 @itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3190 These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3191 transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3192 accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3193 is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3194 instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3195 equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3196 calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3197 a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3198 an error.
3199
3200 @end table
3201
3202 @c man end
3203 @end ifset
3204
3205 @ifset UsesEnvVars
3206 @node Environment
3207 @section Environment Variables
3208
3209 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3210
3211 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
3212 @ifclear SingleFormat
3213 @code{GNUTARGET},
3214 @end ifclear
3215 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
3216
3217 @ifclear SingleFormat
3218 @kindex GNUTARGET
3219 @cindex default input format
3220 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3221 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3222 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
3223 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
3224 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3225 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3226 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3227 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3228 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3229 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3230 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
3231 @end ifclear
3232
3233 @kindex LDEMULATION
3234 @cindex default emulation
3235 @cindex emulation, default
3236 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3237 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3238 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3239 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3240 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3241 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3242 linker was configured.
3243
3244 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3245 @cindex demangling, default
3246 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3247 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3248 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3249 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3250 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3251 options.
3252
3253 @c man end
3254 @end ifset
3255
3256 @node Scripts
3257 @chapter Linker Scripts
3258
3259 @cindex scripts
3260 @cindex linker scripts
3261 @cindex command files
3262 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3263 written in the linker command language.
3264
3265 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3266 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3267 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3268 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3269 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3270 described below.
3271
3272 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3273 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3274 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3275 to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
3276 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3277
3278 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3279 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3280 default linker script.
3281
3282 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3283 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3284 Linker Scripts}.
3285
3286 @menu
3287 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3288 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3289 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3290 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3291 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3292 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3293 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3294 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3295 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3296 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3297 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3298 @end menu
3299
3300 @node Basic Script Concepts
3301 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3302 @cindex linker script concepts
3303 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3304 describe the linker script language.
3305
3306 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3307 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3308 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3309 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3310 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3311 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3312 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3313 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3314
3315 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3316 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3317 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3318 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3319 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3320 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3321 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3322 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3323 of debugging information.
3324
3325 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3326 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3327 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3328 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3329 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3330 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3331 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3332 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3333 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3334 RAM address would be the VMA.
3335
3336 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3337 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3338
3339 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3340 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3341 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3342 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3343 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3344 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3345 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3346
3347 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3348 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3349 option.
3350
3351 @node Script Format
3352 @section Linker Script Format
3353 @cindex linker script format
3354 Linker scripts are text files.
3355
3356 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3357 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3358 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3359 generally ignored.
3360
3361 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3362 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3363 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3364 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3365 file name.
3366
3367 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3368 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3369 to whitespace.
3370
3371 @node Simple Example
3372 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3373 @cindex linker script example
3374 @cindex example of linker script
3375 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3376
3377 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3378 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3379 memory layout of the output file.
3380
3381 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3382 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3383 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3384 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3385 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3386 your input files.
3387
3388 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3389 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3390 linker script which will do that:
3391 @smallexample
3392 SECTIONS
3393 @{
3394 . = 0x10000;
3395 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3396 . = 0x8000000;
3397 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3398 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3399 @}
3400 @end smallexample
3401
3402 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3403 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3404 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3405
3406 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3407 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3408 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3409 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3410 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3411 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3412 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3413
3414 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3415 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3416 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3417 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3418 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3419 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3420
3421 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3422 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3423 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3424
3425 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3426 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3427 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3428 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3429 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3430 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3431 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3432
3433 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3434 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3435 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3436 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3437 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3438 sections.
3439
3440 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3441
3442 @node Simple Commands
3443 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3444 @cindex linker script simple commands
3445 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3446
3447 @menu
3448 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3449 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3450 @ifclear SingleFormat
3451 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3452 @end ifclear
3453
3454 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3455 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3456 @end menu
3457
3458 @node Entry Point
3459 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3460 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3461 @cindex start of execution
3462 @cindex first instruction
3463 @cindex entry point
3464 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3465 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3466 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3467 @smallexample
3468 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3469 @end smallexample
3470
3471 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3472 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3473 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3474 @itemize @bullet
3475 @item
3476 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3477 @item
3478 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3479 @item
3480 the value of a target-specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3481 targets this is @code{start}, but PE- and BeOS-based systems for example
3482 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3483 @item
3484 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3485 @item
3486 The address @code{0}.
3487 @end itemize
3488
3489 @node File Commands
3490 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3491 @cindex linker script file commands
3492 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3493
3494 @table @code
3495 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3496 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3497 @cindex including a linker script
3498 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3499 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3500 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3501 10 levels deep.
3502
3503 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3504 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3505
3506 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3507 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3508 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3509 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3510 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3511 @cindex linker script input object files
3512 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3513 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3514
3515 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3516 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3517 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3518
3519 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3520 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3521
3522 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3523 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3524 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3525 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3526 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3527 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3528 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3529 as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3530 path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
3531 @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3532
3533 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3534 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
3535 @samp{-l}.
3536
3537 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3538 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3539 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3540
3541 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3542 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3543 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3544 @cindex grouping input files
3545 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3546 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3547 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3548 in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3549
3550 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3551 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3552 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3553 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3554 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3555 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3556 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3557 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3558 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3559 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3560 setting afterwards.
3561
3562 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3563 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3564 @cindex output file name in linker script
3565 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3566 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3567 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3568 Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
3569 precedence.
3570
3571 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3572 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3573
3574 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3575 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3576 @cindex library search path in linker script
3577 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3578 @cindex search path in linker script
3579 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3580 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3581 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3582 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
3583 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3584 the command-line option are searched first.
3585
3586 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3587 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3588 @cindex first input file
3589 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3590 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3591 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3592 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3593 first file.
3594 @end table
3595
3596 @ifclear SingleFormat
3597 @node Format Commands
3598 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3599 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3600
3601 @table @code
3602 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3603 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3604 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3605 @cindex output file format in linker script
3606 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3607 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3608 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3609 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
3610 line option takes precedence.
3611
3612 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3613 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
3614 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3615 desired endianness.
3616
3617 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3618 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3619 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3620 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3621
3622 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3623 command:
3624 @smallexample
3625 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3626 @end smallexample
3627 This says that the default format for the output file is
3628 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
3629 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3630 format.
3631
3632 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3633 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3634 @cindex input file format in linker script
3635 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3636 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3637 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3638 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3639 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3640 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3641 @end table
3642 @end ifclear
3643
3644 @node REGION_ALIAS
3645 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3646 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3647 @cindex region alias
3648 @cindex region names
3649
3650 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3651 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3652
3653 @smallexample
3654 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3655 @end smallexample
3656
3657 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3658 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3659 to memory regions. An example follows.
3660
3661 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3662 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3663 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3664 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3665 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3666 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3667 sections:
3668
3669 @itemize @bullet
3670 @item
3671 @code{.text} program code;
3672 @item
3673 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3674 @item
3675 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3676 @item
3677 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3678 @end itemize
3679
3680 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3681 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3682 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3683 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3684 @code{C}:
3685 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3686 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3687 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3688 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3689 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3690 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3691 @end multitable
3692 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3693 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3694 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3695 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3696
3697 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3698 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3699 memory layout:
3700 @smallexample
3701 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3702
3703 SECTIONS
3704 @{
3705 .text :
3706 @{
3707 *(.text)
3708 @} > REGION_TEXT
3709 .rodata :
3710 @{
3711 *(.rodata)
3712 rodata_end = .;
3713 @} > REGION_RODATA
3714 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3715 @{
3716 data_start = .;
3717 *(.data)
3718 @} > REGION_DATA
3719 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3720 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3721 .bss :
3722 @{
3723 *(.bss)
3724 @} > REGION_BSS
3725 @}
3726 @end smallexample
3727
3728 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3729 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3730 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3731 @table @code
3732 @item A
3733 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3734 @smallexample
3735 MEMORY
3736 @{
3737 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3738 @}
3739
3740 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3741 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3742 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3743 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3744 @end smallexample
3745 @item B
3746 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3747 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3748 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3749 @smallexample
3750 MEMORY
3751 @{
3752 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3753 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3754 @}
3755
3756 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3757 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3758 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3759 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3760 @end smallexample
3761 @item C
3762 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3763 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3764 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3765 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3766 @smallexample
3767 MEMORY
3768 @{
3769 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3770 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3771 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3772 @}
3773
3774 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3775 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3776 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3777 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3778 @end smallexample
3779 @end table
3780
3781 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3782 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3783 necessary:
3784 @smallexample
3785 #include <string.h>
3786
3787 extern char data_start [];
3788 extern char data_size [];
3789 extern char data_load_start [];
3790
3791 void copy_data(void)
3792 @{
3793 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3794 @{
3795 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3796 @}
3797 @}
3798 @end smallexample
3799
3800 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3801 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3802 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3803
3804 @table @code
3805 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3806 @kindex ASSERT
3807 @cindex assertion in linker script
3808 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3809 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3810
3811 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3812 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3813 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3814 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3815 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3816
3817 @smallexample
3818 .stack :
3819 @{
3820 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3821 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3822 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3823 @}
3824 @end smallexample
3825
3826 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3827 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3828 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3829
3830 @smallexample
3831 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3832 .stack :
3833 @{
3834 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3835 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3836 @}
3837 @end smallexample
3838
3839 will work.
3840
3841 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3842 @kindex EXTERN
3843 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3844 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3845 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3846 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3847 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3848 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3849
3850 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3851 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3852 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3853 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3854 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3855 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3856
3857 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3858 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3859 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3860 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3861 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3862 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3863
3864 @item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3865 @kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3866 @cindex group allocation in linker script
3867 @cindex section groups
3868 @cindex COMDAT
3869 This command has the same effect as the
3870 @samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3871 @command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3872 and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3873 specified (@samp{-r}).
3874
3875 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3876 @kindex INSERT
3877 @cindex insert user script into default script
3878 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3879 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3880 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3881 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3882 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3883 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3884 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3885 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3886 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3887 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3888 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3889 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3890 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3891
3892 @smallexample
3893 SECTIONS
3894 @{
3895 OVERLAY :
3896 @{
3897 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3898 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3899 @}
3900 @}
3901 INSERT AFTER .text;
3902 @end smallexample
3903
3904 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3905 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3906 @cindex cross references
3907 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3908 references among certain output sections.
3909
3910 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3911 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3912 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3913 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3914 a function defined in the other section.
3915
3916 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3917 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3918 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3919 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3920 names.
3921
3922 @item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3923 @kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3924 @cindex cross references
3925 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3926 references to one section from a list of other sections.
3927
3928 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3929 output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3930 a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3931 there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3932 must never call back.
3933
3934 The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3935 The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3936 If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3937 the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3938 status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3939 names, not input section names.
3940
3941 @ifclear SingleFormat
3942 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3943 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3944 @cindex machine architecture
3945 @cindex architecture
3946 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3947 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3948 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3949 the @samp{-f} option.
3950 @end ifclear
3951
3952 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3953 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3954 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3955 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3956 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3957 @xref{Expression Section}.
3958 @end table
3959
3960 @node Assignments
3961 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3962 @cindex assignment in scripts
3963 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3964 @cindex variables, defining
3965 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3966 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3967
3968 @menu
3969 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3970 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3971 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3972 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3973 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3974 @end menu
3975
3976 @node Simple Assignments
3977 @subsection Simple Assignments
3978
3979 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3980
3981 @table @code
3982 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3983 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3984 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3985 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3986 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3987 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3988 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3989 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3990 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3991 @end table
3992
3993 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3994 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3995 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3996
3997 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3998 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3999
4000 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
4001
4002 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
4003
4004 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
4005 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
4006 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
4007
4008 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
4009 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
4010
4011 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
4012 assignments may be used:
4013
4014 @smallexample
4015 floating_point = 0;
4016 SECTIONS
4017 @{
4018 .text :
4019 @{
4020 *(.text)
4021 _etext = .;
4022 @}
4023 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
4024 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4025 @}
4026 @end smallexample
4027 @noindent
4028 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
4029 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
4030 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
4031 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
4032 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
4033
4034 @node HIDDEN
4035 @subsection HIDDEN
4036 @cindex HIDDEN
4037 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
4038 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4039
4040 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
4041 @code{HIDDEN}:
4042
4043 @smallexample
4044 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
4045 SECTIONS
4046 @{
4047 .text :
4048 @{
4049 *(.text)
4050 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
4051 @}
4052 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
4053 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4054 @}
4055 @end smallexample
4056 @noindent
4057 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
4058
4059 @node PROVIDE
4060 @subsection PROVIDE
4061 @cindex PROVIDE
4062 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
4063 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
4064 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
4065 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
4066 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
4067 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
4068 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
4069 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4070
4071 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4072 @smallexample
4073 SECTIONS
4074 @{
4075 .text :
4076 @{
4077 *(.text)
4078 _etext = .;
4079 PROVIDE(etext = .);
4080 @}
4081 @}
4082 @end smallexample
4083
4084 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4085 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4086 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4087 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4088 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4089 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4090
4091 Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4092 defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4093 that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4094 when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4095 @samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4096
4097 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4098 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4099 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4100 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4101 hidden and won't be exported.
4102
4103 @node Source Code Reference
4104 @subsection Source Code Reference
4105
4106 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4107 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4108 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4109 symbol that does not have a value.
4110
4111 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4112 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4113 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4114 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4115 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4116 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4117 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4118 linker script variable might be referred to as:
4119
4120 @smallexample
4121 extern int foo;
4122 @end smallexample
4123
4124 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4125
4126 @smallexample
4127 _foo = 1000;
4128 @end smallexample
4129
4130 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4131 transformation has taken place.
4132
4133 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4134 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4135 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4136 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4137 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4138 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4139 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4140
4141 @smallexample
4142 int foo = 1000;
4143 @end smallexample
4144
4145 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
4146 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4147 number 1000 is initially stored.
4148
4149 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4150 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4151 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4152 So:
4153
4154 @smallexample
4155 foo = 1;
4156 @end smallexample
4157
4158 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4159 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4160 address. Whereas:
4161
4162 @smallexample
4163 int * a = & foo;
4164 @end smallexample
4165
4166 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
4167 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4168 the variable @samp{a}.
4169
4170 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4171 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4172 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4173
4174 @smallexample
4175 foo = 1000;
4176 @end smallexample
4177
4178 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4179 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4180 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4181 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4182 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4183
4184 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4185 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4186 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4187 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4188 linker script contains these declarations:
4189
4190 @smallexample
4191 @group
4192 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
4193 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
4194 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4195 @end group
4196 @end smallexample
4197
4198 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4199
4200 @smallexample
4201 @group
4202 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
4203
4204 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4205 @end group
4206 @end smallexample
4207
4208 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
4209 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4210 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4211
4212 @smallexample
4213 @group
4214 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4215
4216 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4217 @end group
4218 @end smallexample
4219
4220 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4221 operators.
4222
4223 @node SECTIONS
4224 @section SECTIONS Command
4225 @kindex SECTIONS
4226 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4227 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4228
4229 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4230 @smallexample
4231 SECTIONS
4232 @{
4233 @var{sections-command}
4234 @var{sections-command}
4235 @dots{}
4236 @}
4237 @end smallexample
4238
4239 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4240
4241 @itemize @bullet
4242 @item
4243 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4244 @item
4245 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4246 @item
4247 an output section description
4248 @item
4249 an overlay description
4250 @end itemize
4251
4252 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4253 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4254 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4255 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4256 the layout of the output file.
4257
4258 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4259 below.
4260
4261 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4262 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4263 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4264 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4265 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4266 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4267
4268 @menu
4269 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
4270 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
4271 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
4272 * Input Section:: Input section description
4273 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
4274 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4275 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4276 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4277 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4278 @end menu
4279
4280 @node Output Section Description
4281 @subsection Output Section Description
4282 The full description of an output section looks like this:
4283 @smallexample
4284 @group
4285 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4286 [AT(@var{lma})]
4287 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4288 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4289 [@var{constraint}]
4290 @{
4291 @var{output-section-command}
4292 @var{output-section-command}
4293 @dots{}
4294 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4295 @end group
4296 @end smallexample
4297
4298 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4299
4300 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4301 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4302 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4303 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4304 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4305
4306 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4307
4308 @itemize @bullet
4309 @item
4310 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4311 @item
4312 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4313 @item
4314 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4315 @item
4316 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4317 @end itemize
4318
4319 @node Output Section Name
4320 @subsection Output Section Name
4321 @cindex name, section
4322 @cindex section name
4323 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4324 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4325 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4326 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4327 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4328 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4329 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4330 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4331 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4332 commas must be quoted.
4333
4334 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4335 Discarding}.
4336
4337 @node Output Section Address
4338 @subsection Output Section Address
4339 @cindex address, section
4340 @cindex section address
4341 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4342 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4343 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4344
4345 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4346 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4347 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4348 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4349 contained within the output section.
4350
4351 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4352
4353 @itemize @bullet
4354 @item
4355 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4356 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4357 in that region.
4358
4359 @item
4360 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4361 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4362 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4363 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4364
4365 @item
4366 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4367 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4368 counter.
4369 @end itemize
4370
4371 @noindent
4372 For example:
4373
4374 @smallexample
4375 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4376 @end smallexample
4377
4378 @noindent
4379 and
4380
4381 @smallexample
4382 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4383 @end smallexample
4384
4385 @noindent
4386 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4387 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4388 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4389 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4390 input sections.
4391
4392 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4393 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4394 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4395 do something like this:
4396 @smallexample
4397 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4398 @end smallexample
4399 @noindent
4400 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4401 aligned upward to the specified value.
4402
4403 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4404 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4405 sections are ignored).
4406
4407 @node Input Section
4408 @subsection Input Section Description
4409 @cindex input sections
4410 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4411 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4412
4413 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4414 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4415 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4416 map the input files into your memory layout.
4417
4418 @menu
4419 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4420 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4421 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4422 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4423 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4424 @end menu
4425
4426 @node Input Section Basics
4427 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4428 @cindex input section basics
4429 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4430 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4431
4432 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4433 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4434
4435 The most common input section description is to include all input
4436 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4437 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4438 @smallexample
4439 *(.text)
4440 @end smallexample
4441 @noindent
4442 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4443 @cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
4444 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4445 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4446 example:
4447 @smallexample
4448 EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4449 @end smallexample
4450 @noindent
4451 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4452 and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4453 placed inside the section list, for example:
4454 @smallexample
4455 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4456 @end smallexample
4457 @noindent
4458 The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4459 two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4460 more than one section, as described below.
4461
4462 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4463 @smallexample
4464 *(.text .rdata)
4465 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4466 @end smallexample
4467 @noindent
4468 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4469 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4470 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4471 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4472 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4473 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4474
4475 When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4476 is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4477 immediately following section, for example:
4478 @smallexample
4479 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4480 @end smallexample
4481 @noindent
4482 will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4483 @file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4484 from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4485 exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
4486 could be modified to:
4487 @smallexample
4488 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4489 @end smallexample
4490 @noindent
4491 Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4492 before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4493 all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4494 @smallexample
4495 EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4496 @end smallexample
4497
4498 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4499 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4500 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4501 @smallexample
4502 data.o(.data)
4503 @end smallexample
4504
4505 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4506 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4507
4508 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4509
4510 @smallexample
4511 @group
4512 SECTIONS @{
4513 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4514 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4515 @}
4516 @end group
4517 @end smallexample
4518
4519 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4520 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4521 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4522 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4523 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4524
4525 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4526 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4527 with no whitespace around the colon.
4528
4529 @table @samp
4530 @item archive:file
4531 matches file within archive
4532 @item archive:
4533 matches the whole archive
4534 @item :file
4535 matches file but not one in an archive
4536 @end table
4537
4538 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4539 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4540 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4541 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4542 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4543 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4544 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4545 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4546 command.
4547
4548 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4549 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4550 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4551 @smallexample
4552 data.o
4553 @end smallexample
4554
4555 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4556 and does not contain any wild card
4557 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4558 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4559 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4560 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4561 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4562 the archive search path.
4563
4564 @node Input Section Wildcards
4565 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4566 @cindex input section wildcards
4567 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4568 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4569 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4570 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4571 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4572
4573 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4574 pattern for the file name.
4575
4576 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4577
4578 @table @samp
4579 @item *
4580 matches any number of characters
4581 @item ?
4582 matches any single character
4583 @item [@var{chars}]
4584 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4585 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4586 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4587 @item \
4588 quotes the following character
4589 @end table
4590
4591 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4592 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4593 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4594 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4595 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4596 a @samp{/} character.
4597
4598 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4599 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4600 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4601
4602 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4603 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4604 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4605 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4606 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4607 @smallexample
4608 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4609 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4610 @end smallexample
4611
4612 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4613 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4614 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4615 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4616 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4617 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4618 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4619
4620 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4621 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4622 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4623 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4624 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4625 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4626
4627 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4628 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4629 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4630 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4631 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4632
4633 @cindex SORT
4634 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4635
4636 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4637 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4638
4639 @enumerate
4640 @item
4641 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4642 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4643 sections have the same name.
4644 @item
4645 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4646 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4647 sections have the same alignment.
4648 @item
4649 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4650 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4651 @item
4652 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4653 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4654 @item
4655 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4656 @end enumerate
4657
4658 When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
4659 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4660 takes precedence over the command-line option.
4661
4662 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4663 command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
4664 treated as nested sorting command.
4665
4666 @enumerate
4667 @item
4668 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4669 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4670 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4671 @item
4672 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4673 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4674 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4675 @end enumerate
4676
4677 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4678 command-line option will be ignored.
4679
4680 @cindex SORT_NONE
4681 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
4682 section sorting option.
4683
4684 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4685 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4686 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4687
4688 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4689 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4690 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4691 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4692 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4693 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4694 @smallexample
4695 @group
4696 SECTIONS @{
4697 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4698 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4699 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4700 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4701 @}
4702 @end group
4703 @end smallexample
4704
4705 @node Input Section Common
4706 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4707 @cindex common symbol placement
4708 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4709 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4710 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4711 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4712 named @samp{COMMON}.
4713
4714 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4715 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4716 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4717 input files are placed in another section.
4718
4719 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4720 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4721 @smallexample
4722 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4723 @end smallexample
4724
4725 @cindex scommon section
4726 @cindex small common symbols
4727 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4728 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4729 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4730 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4731 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4732 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4733 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4734 locations.
4735
4736 @cindex [COMMON]
4737 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4738 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4739 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4740
4741 @node Input Section Keep
4742 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4743 @cindex KEEP
4744 @cindex garbage collection
4745 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4746 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4747 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4748 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4749 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4750
4751 @node Input Section Example
4752 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4753 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4754 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4755 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4756 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4757 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4758 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4759 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4760 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4761 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4762
4763 @smallexample
4764 @group
4765 SECTIONS @{
4766 outputa 0x10000 :
4767 @{
4768 all.o
4769 foo.o (.input1)
4770 @}
4771 @end group
4772 @group
4773 outputb :
4774 @{
4775 foo.o (.input2)
4776 foo1.o (.input1)
4777 @}
4778 @end group
4779 @group
4780 outputc :
4781 @{
4782 *(.input1)
4783 *(.input2)
4784 @}
4785 @}
4786 @end group
4787 @end smallexample
4788
4789 If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4790 and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4791 automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4792 __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4793 indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4794 respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4795 C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4796
4797 @node Output Section Data
4798 @subsection Output Section Data
4799 @cindex data
4800 @cindex section data
4801 @cindex output section data
4802 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4803 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4804 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4805 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4806 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4807 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4808 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4809 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4810 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4811 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4812 counter.
4813
4814 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4815 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4816 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4817 stored.
4818
4819 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4820 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4821 @smallexample
4822 BYTE(1)
4823 LONG(addr)
4824 @end smallexample
4825
4826 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4827 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4828 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4829 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4830 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4831
4832 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4833 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4834 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4835 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4836 endianness of the first input object file.
4837
4838 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4839 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4840 @smallexample
4841 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4842 @end smallexample
4843 whereas this will work:
4844 @smallexample
4845 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4846 @end smallexample
4847
4848 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4849 @cindex holes, filling
4850 @cindex unspecified memory
4851 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4852 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4853 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4854 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4855 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4856 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4857 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4858 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4859 different parts of an output section.
4860
4861 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4862 value @samp{0x90}:
4863 @smallexample
4864 FILL(0x90909090)
4865 @end smallexample
4866
4867 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4868 section attribute, but it only affects the
4869 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4870 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4871 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4872 expression.
4873
4874 @node Output Section Keywords
4875 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4876 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4877 commands.
4878
4879 @table @code
4880 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4881 @cindex input filename symbols
4882 @cindex filename symbols
4883 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4884 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4885 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4886 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4887 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4888
4889 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4890 normally used for any other object file format.
4891
4892 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4893 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4894 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4895 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4896 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4897 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4898 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4899 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4900 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4901 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4902 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4903 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4904 ignored for other object file formats.
4905
4906 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4907 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4908 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4909 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4910 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4911 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4912 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4913 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4914 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4915 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4916 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4917 @code{exit}.
4918
4919 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4920 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4921 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4922 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4923 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4924 runtime code expects to see.
4925
4926 @smallexample
4927 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4928 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4929 *(.ctors)
4930 LONG(0)
4931 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4932 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4933 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4934 *(.dtors)
4935 LONG(0)
4936 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4937 @end smallexample
4938
4939 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4940 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4941 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4942 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4943 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4944 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4945 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4946 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4947
4948 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4949 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4950 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4951 scripts.
4952
4953 @end table
4954
4955 @node Output Section Discarding
4956 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4957 @cindex discarding sections
4958 @cindex sections, discarding
4959 @cindex removing sections
4960 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4961 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4962 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4963 @smallexample
4964 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4965 @end smallexample
4966 @noindent
4967 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4968 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4969 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4970 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4971 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4972 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4973 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4974 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4975 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4976
4977 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4978 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4979 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4980 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4981 section is discarded.
4982
4983 @cindex /DISCARD/
4984 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4985 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4986 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4987
4988 @node Output Section Attributes
4989 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4990 @cindex output section attributes
4991 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4992 like this:
4993
4994 @smallexample
4995 @group
4996 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4997 [AT(@var{lma})]
4998 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4999 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
5000 [@var{constraint}]
5001 @{
5002 @var{output-section-command}
5003 @var{output-section-command}
5004 @dots{}
5005 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
5006 @end group
5007 @end smallexample
5008
5009 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
5010 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
5011 remaining section attributes.
5012
5013 @menu
5014 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
5015 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
5016 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
5017 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
5018 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
5019 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
5020 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
5021 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
5022 @end menu
5023
5024 @node Output Section Type
5025 @subsubsection Output Section Type
5026 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
5027 parentheses. The following types are defined:
5028
5029 @table @code
5030 @item NOLOAD
5031 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
5032 loaded into memory when the program is run.
5033 @item DSECT
5034 @itemx COPY
5035 @itemx INFO
5036 @itemx OVERLAY
5037 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
5038 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
5039 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
5040 section when the program is run.
5041 @end table
5042
5043 @kindex NOLOAD
5044 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
5045 @cindex loading, preventing
5046 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
5047 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
5048 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
5049 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
5050 need to be loaded when the program is run.
5051 @smallexample
5052 @group
5053 SECTIONS @{
5054 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
5055 @dots{}
5056 @}
5057 @end group
5058 @end smallexample
5059
5060 @node Output Section LMA
5061 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
5062 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
5063 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
5064 @cindex load address
5065 @cindex section load address
5066 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
5067 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
5068 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
5069 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
5070 address is optional.
5071
5072 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5073 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5074 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5075 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5076 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
5077
5078 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
5079 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5080 load address:
5081
5082 @itemize @bullet
5083 @item
5084 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5085 the LMA address as well.
5086
5087 @item
5088 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5089
5090 @item
5091 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5092 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5093 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5094 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5095 the last section in the located region.
5096
5097 @item
5098 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5099 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5100
5101 @item
5102 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5103 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5104 @end itemize
5105
5106 @cindex ROM initialized data
5107 @cindex initialized data in ROM
5108 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5109 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5110 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5111 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5112 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5113 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5114 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5115 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5116
5117 @smallexample
5118 @group
5119 SECTIONS
5120 @{
5121 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
5122 .mdata 0x2000 :
5123 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5124 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5125 .bss 0x3000 :
5126 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5127 @}
5128 @end group
5129 @end smallexample
5130
5131 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5132 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5133 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5134 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5135 script.
5136
5137 @smallexample
5138 @group
5139 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5140 char *src = &_etext;
5141 char *dst = &_data;
5142
5143 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5144 while (dst < &_edata)
5145 *dst++ = *src++;
5146
5147 /* Zero bss. */
5148 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5149 *dst = 0;
5150 @end group
5151 @end smallexample
5152
5153 @node Forced Output Alignment
5154 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5155 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5156 @cindex forcing output section alignment
5157 @cindex output section alignment
5158 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
5159 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5160 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
5161
5162 @node Forced Input Alignment
5163 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5164 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5165 @cindex forcing input section alignment
5166 @cindex input section alignment
5167 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5168 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5169 sections, whether larger or smaller.
5170
5171 @node Output Section Constraint
5172 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5173 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5174 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5175 @cindex constraints on output sections
5176 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5177 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5178 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5179 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5180
5181 @node Output Section Region
5182 @subsubsection Output Section Region
5183 @kindex >@var{region}
5184 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
5185 @cindex memory regions and sections
5186 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5187 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5188
5189 Here is a simple example:
5190 @smallexample
5191 @group
5192 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5193 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5194 @end group
5195 @end smallexample
5196
5197 @node Output Section Phdr
5198 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
5199 @kindex :@var{phdr}
5200 @cindex section, assigning to program header
5201 @cindex program headers and sections
5202 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5203 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5204 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5205 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5206 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5207 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5208
5209 Here is a simple example:
5210 @smallexample
5211 @group
5212 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5213 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5214 @end group
5215 @end smallexample
5216
5217 @node Output Section Fill
5218 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
5219 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
5220 @cindex section fill pattern
5221 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
5222 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5223 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5224 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5225 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
5226 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5227 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
5228 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
5229 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5230 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
5231 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
5232 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5233 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
5234
5235 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
5236 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
5237
5238 Here is a simple example:
5239 @smallexample
5240 @group
5241 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
5242 @end group
5243 @end smallexample
5244
5245 @node Overlay Description
5246 @subsection Overlay Description
5247 @kindex OVERLAY
5248 @cindex overlays
5249 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5250 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5251 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5252 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5253 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5254 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5255 than another.
5256
5257 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5258 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5259 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5260 command is as follows:
5261 @smallexample
5262 @group
5263 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5264 @{
5265 @var{secname1}
5266 @{
5267 @var{output-section-command}
5268 @var{output-section-command}
5269 @dots{}
5270 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5271 @var{secname2}
5272 @{
5273 @var{output-section-command}
5274 @var{output-section-command}
5275 @dots{}
5276 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5277 @dots{}
5278 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
5279 @end group
5280 @end smallexample
5281
5282 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5283 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5284 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
5285 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
5286 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5287 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5288
5289 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5290 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5291
5292 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5293 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5294 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5295 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5296 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5297 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5298
5299 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5300 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5301 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5302 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5303 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
5304
5305 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
5306 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
5307 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5308 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5309 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5310 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5311 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5312
5313 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5314 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5315
5316 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5317 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
5318 @smallexample
5319 @group
5320 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5321 @{
5322 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5323 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5324 @}
5325 @end group
5326 @end smallexample
5327 @noindent
5328 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5329 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5330 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
5331 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5332 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5333 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
5334
5335 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5336 like the following.
5337
5338 @smallexample
5339 @group
5340 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5341 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5342 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5343 @end group
5344 @end smallexample
5345
5346 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5347 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5348 example could have been written identically as follows.
5349
5350 @smallexample
5351 @group
5352 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5353 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5354 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5355 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5356 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5357 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5358 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5359 @end group
5360 @end smallexample
5361
5362 @node MEMORY
5363 @section MEMORY Command
5364 @kindex MEMORY
5365 @cindex memory regions
5366 @cindex regions of memory
5367 @cindex allocating memory
5368 @cindex discontinuous memory
5369 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5370 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5371
5372 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5373 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5374 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5375 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5376 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5377 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5378 around to fit into the available regions.
5379
5380 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5381 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5382 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5383 @code{MEMORY} is:
5384 @smallexample
5385 @group
5386 MEMORY
5387 @{
5388 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5389 @dots{}
5390 @}
5391 @end group
5392 @end smallexample
5393
5394 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5395 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5396 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5397 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5398 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5399 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5400 command.
5401
5402 @cindex memory region attributes
5403 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5404 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5405 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5406 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5407 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5408 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5409 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5410
5411 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5412 @table @samp
5413 @item R
5414 Read-only section
5415 @item W
5416 Read/write section
5417 @item X
5418 Executable section
5419 @item A
5420 Allocatable section
5421 @item I
5422 Initialized section
5423 @item L
5424 Same as @samp{I}
5425 @item !
5426 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5427 @end table
5428
5429 If an unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5430 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5431 attribute reverses the test for the characters that follow, so that an
5432 unmapped section will be placed in the memory region only if it does
5433 not match any of the attributes listed afterwards. Thus an attribute
5434 string of @samp{RW!X} will match any unmapped section that has either
5435 or both of the @samp{R} and @samp{W} attributes, but only as long as
5436 the section does not also have the @samp{X} attribute.
5437
5438 @kindex ORIGIN =
5439 @kindex o =
5440 @kindex org =
5441 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5442 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5443 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5444 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5445 @code{ORG}).
5446
5447 @kindex LENGTH =
5448 @kindex len =
5449 @kindex l =
5450 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5451 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5452 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5453 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5454
5455 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5456 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5457 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5458 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5459 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5460 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5461 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5462 region.
5463
5464 @smallexample
5465 @group
5466 MEMORY
5467 @{
5468 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5469 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5470 @}
5471 @end group
5472 @end smallexample
5473
5474 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5475 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5476 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5477 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5478 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5479 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5480 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5481 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5482 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5483
5484 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5485 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5486 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5487
5488 @smallexample
5489 @group
5490 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5491 @end group
5492 @end smallexample
5493
5494 @node PHDRS
5495 @section PHDRS Command
5496 @kindex PHDRS
5497 @cindex program headers
5498 @cindex ELF program headers
5499 @cindex program segments
5500 @cindex segments, ELF
5501 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5502 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5503 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5504 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5505
5506 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5507 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5508 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5509 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5510 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5511
5512 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5513 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5514 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5515 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5516 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5517
5518 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5519 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5520 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5521
5522 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5523 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5524
5525 @smallexample
5526 @group
5527 PHDRS
5528 @{
5529 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5530 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5531 @}
5532 @end group
5533 @end smallexample
5534
5535 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5536 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5537 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5538 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5539 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5540 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5541
5542 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5543 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5544 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5545 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5546 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5547 Section Phdr}.
5548
5549 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5550 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5551 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5552 contain the section.
5553
5554 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5555 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5556 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5557 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5558 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5559 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5560 segment at all.
5561
5562 @kindex FILEHDR
5563 @kindex PHDRS
5564 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5565 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5566 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5567 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5568 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5569 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5570 these keywords.
5571
5572 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5573 value of the keyword.
5574
5575 @table @asis
5576 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5577 Indicates an unused program header.
5578
5579 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5580 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5581 the file.
5582
5583 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5584 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5585
5586 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5587 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5588 found.
5589
5590 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5591 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5592
5593 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5594 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5595 ABI.
5596
5597 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5598 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5599
5600 @item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5601 Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5602
5603 @item @var{expression}
5604 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5605 be used for types not defined above.
5606 @end table
5607
5608 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5609 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5610 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5611 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5612 output section attribute.
5613
5614 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5615 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5616 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5617 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5618 header.
5619
5620 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5621 headers used on a native ELF system.
5622
5623 @example
5624 @group
5625 PHDRS
5626 @{
5627 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5628 interp PT_INTERP ;
5629 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5630 data PT_LOAD ;
5631 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5632 @}
5633
5634 SECTIONS
5635 @{
5636 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5637 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5638 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5639 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5640 @dots{}
5641 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5642 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5643 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5644 @dots{}
5645 @}
5646 @end group
5647 @end example
5648
5649 @node VERSION
5650 @section VERSION Command
5651 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5652 @cindex symbol versions
5653 @cindex version script
5654 @cindex versions of symbols
5655 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5656 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5657 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5658 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5659 shared library.
5660
5661 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5662 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5663 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5664
5665 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5666 @smallexample
5667 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5668 @end smallexample
5669
5670 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5671 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5672 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5673 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5674 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5675 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5676 library.
5677
5678 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5679 examples.
5680
5681 @smallexample
5682 VERS_1.1 @{
5683 global:
5684 foo1;
5685 local:
5686 old*;
5687 original*;
5688 new*;
5689 @};
5690
5691 VERS_1.2 @{
5692 foo2;
5693 @} VERS_1.1;
5694
5695 VERS_2.0 @{
5696 bar1; bar2;
5697 extern "C++" @{
5698 ns::*;
5699 "f(int, double)";
5700 @};
5701 @} VERS_1.2;
5702 @end smallexample
5703
5704 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5705 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5706 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5707 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5708 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5709 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5710 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5711 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5712 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5713 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5714
5715 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5716 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5717 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5718
5719 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5720 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5721 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5722
5723 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5724 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5725 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5726 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5727 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5728 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5729 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5730 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5731 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5732
5733 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5734 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5735 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5736 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5737
5738 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5739 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5740 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5741 won't.
5742
5743 @smallexample
5744 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5745 @end smallexample
5746
5747 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5748 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5749 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5750 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5751 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5752 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5753 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5754 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5755 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5756 search for each symbol reference.
5757
5758 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5759 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5760 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5761 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5762 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5763 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5764 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5765 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5766 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5767
5768 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5769 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5770 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5771 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5772 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5773 @smallexample
5774 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5775 @end smallexample
5776 @noindent
5777 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5778 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5779 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5780 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5781 takes precedence over a version script.
5782
5783 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5784 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5785 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5786 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5787 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5788
5789 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5790 source file. Here is an example:
5791
5792 @smallexample
5793 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5794 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5795 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5796 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5797 @end smallexample
5798
5799 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5800 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5801 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5802 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5803
5804 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5805 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5806 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5807 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5808 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5809 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5810
5811 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5812 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5813 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5814 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5815
5816 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5817
5818 @smallexample
5819 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5820 @end smallexample
5821
5822 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5823 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5824 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5825 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5826 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5827
5828 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5829 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5830 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5831 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5832 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5833 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5834 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5835 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5836 expect when you upgrade.
5837
5838 @node Expressions
5839 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5840 @cindex expressions
5841 @cindex arithmetic
5842 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5843 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5844 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5845 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5846
5847 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5848
5849 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5850 expressions.
5851
5852 @menu
5853 * Constants:: Constants
5854 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5855 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5856 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5857 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5858 * Operators:: Operators
5859 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5860 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5861 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5862 @end menu
5863
5864 @node Constants
5865 @subsection Constants
5866 @cindex integer notation
5867 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5868 All constants are integers.
5869
5870 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5871 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5872 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5873 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5874 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5875 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5876
5877 @cindex scaled integers
5878 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5879 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5880 @cindex suffixes for integers
5881 @cindex integer suffixes
5882 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5883 constant by
5884 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5885 @ifnottex
5886 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5887 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5888 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5889 @end ifnottex
5890 @tex
5891 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5892 @end tex
5893 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5894 respectively. For example, the following
5895 all refer to the same quantity:
5896
5897 @smallexample
5898 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5899 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5900 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5901 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5902 @end smallexample
5903
5904 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5905 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5906
5907 @node Symbolic Constants
5908 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5909 @cindex symbolic constants
5910 @kindex CONSTANT
5911 It is possible to refer to target-specific constants via the use of
5912 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5913
5914 @table @code
5915 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5916 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5917 The target's maximum page size.
5918
5919 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5920 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5921 The target's default page size.
5922 @end table
5923
5924 So for example:
5925
5926 @smallexample
5927 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5928 @end smallexample
5929
5930 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5931 supported by the target.
5932
5933 @node Symbols
5934 @subsection Symbol Names
5935 @cindex symbol names
5936 @cindex names
5937 @cindex quoted symbol names
5938 @kindex "
5939 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5940 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5941 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5942 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5943 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5944 @smallexample
5945 "SECTION" = 9;
5946 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5947 @end smallexample
5948
5949 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5950 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5951 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5952
5953 @node Orphan Sections
5954 @subsection Orphan Sections
5955 @cindex orphan
5956 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5957 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5958 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5959 output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5960 in which to place the orphaned input section.
5961
5962 If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5963 an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5964 placed at the end of that output section.
5965
5966 If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5967 sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5968 name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5969 orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5970 one new output section.
5971
5972 If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5973 then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
5974 in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5975 linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5976 attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5977 sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5978 support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
5979
5980 The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5981 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
5982 output sections an orphan is placed in.
5983
5984 @node Location Counter
5985 @subsection The Location Counter
5986 @kindex .
5987 @cindex dot
5988 @cindex location counter
5989 @cindex current output location
5990 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5991 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5992 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5993 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5994 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5995
5996 @cindex holes
5997 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5998 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5999 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
6000 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
6001 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
6002
6003 @smallexample
6004 SECTIONS
6005 @{
6006 output :
6007 @{
6008 file1(.text)
6009 . = . + 1000;
6010 file2(.text)
6011 . += 1000;
6012 file3(.text)
6013 @} = 0x12345678;
6014 @}
6015 @end smallexample
6016 @noindent
6017 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
6018 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
6019 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
6020 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
6021 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
6022 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
6023
6024 @cindex dot inside sections
6025 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
6026 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
6027 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
6028 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
6029 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
6030 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
6031
6032 @smallexample
6033 SECTIONS
6034 @{
6035 . = 0x100
6036 .text: @{
6037 *(.text)
6038 . = 0x200
6039 @}
6040 . = 0x500
6041 .data: @{
6042 *(.data)
6043 . += 0x600
6044 @}
6045 @}
6046 @end smallexample
6047
6048 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
6049 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
6050 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
6051 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
6052 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
6053 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
6054 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
6055 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
6056
6057 @cindex dot outside sections
6058 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
6059 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
6060 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
6061
6062 @smallexample
6063 SECTIONS
6064 @{
6065 start_of_text = . ;
6066 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6067 end_of_text = . ;
6068
6069 start_of_data = . ;
6070 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6071 end_of_data = . ;
6072 @}
6073 @end smallexample
6074
6075 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6076 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6077 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6078 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6079 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6080 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6081 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6082 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6083 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6084 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6085 as follows:
6086
6087 @smallexample
6088 SECTIONS
6089 @{
6090 start_of_text = . ;
6091 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6092 end_of_text = . ;
6093
6094 start_of_data = . ;
6095 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6096 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6097 end_of_data = . ;
6098 @}
6099 @end smallexample
6100
6101 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6102 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6103 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6104 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6105 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6106 section. So you could write:
6107
6108 @smallexample
6109 SECTIONS
6110 @{
6111 start_of_text = . ;
6112 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6113 end_of_text = . ;
6114
6115 . = . ;
6116 start_of_data = . ;
6117 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6118 end_of_data = . ;
6119 @}
6120 @end smallexample
6121
6122 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6123 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6124
6125 @need 2000
6126 @node Operators
6127 @subsection Operators
6128 @cindex operators for arithmetic
6129 @cindex arithmetic operators
6130 @cindex precedence in expressions
6131 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6132 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6133 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6134 @ifnottex
6135 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6136 @smallexample
6137 precedence associativity Operators Notes
6138 (highest)
6139 1 left ! - ~ (1)
6140 2 left * / %
6141 3 left + -
6142 4 left >> <<
6143 5 left == != > < <= >=
6144 6 left &
6145 7 left |
6146 8 left &&
6147 9 left ||
6148 10 right ? :
6149 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6150 (lowest)
6151 @end smallexample
6152 Notes:
6153 (1) Prefix operators
6154 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
6155 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6156 @end ifnottex
6157 @tex
6158 \vskip \baselineskip
6159 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6160 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6161 \hrule
6162 \halign
6163 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6164 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6165 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6166 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6167 \noalign{\hrule}
6168 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6169 &highest&&&&&\cr
6170 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
6171 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
6172 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6173 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6174 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6175 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6176 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
6177 &7&&left&&|&\cr
6178 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6179 &9&&left&&||&\cr
6180 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
6181 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6182 &lowest&&&&&\cr
6183 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6184 \hrule}
6185 @end tex
6186 @iftex
6187 {
6188 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6189 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
6190 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6191 }
6192 @end iftex
6193 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6194
6195 @node Evaluation
6196 @subsection Evaluation
6197 @cindex lazy evaluation
6198 @cindex expression evaluation order
6199 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6200 an expression when absolutely necessary.
6201
6202 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6203 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6204 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6205 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6206
6207 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6208 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6209 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6210 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6211
6212 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6213 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6214 allocation.
6215
6216 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6217 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6218
6219 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6220 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6221 following
6222 @smallexample
6223 @group
6224 SECTIONS
6225 @{
6226 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
6227 @{ *(.text) @}
6228 @}
6229 @end group
6230 @end smallexample
6231 @noindent
6232 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6233 address}.
6234
6235 @node Expression Section
6236 @subsection The Section of an Expression
6237 @cindex expression sections
6238 @cindex absolute expressions
6239 @cindex relative expressions
6240 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6241 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6242 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
6243 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6244 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6245 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6246 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6247 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6248 operations.
6249
6250 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6251 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6252 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6253 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6254 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
6255 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6256 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
6257 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6258 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6259 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6260 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
6261 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6262 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6263 everywhere.
6264
6265 In the following simple example,
6266
6267 @smallexample
6268 @group
6269 SECTIONS
6270 @{
6271 . = 0x100;
6272 __executable_start = 0x100;
6273 .data :
6274 @{
6275 . = 0x10;
6276 __data_start = 0x10;
6277 *(.data)
6278 @}
6279 @dots{}
6280 @}
6281 @end group
6282 @end smallexample
6283
6284 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6285 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6286 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6287 section in the second two assignments.
6288
6289 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6290 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
6291
6292 @itemize @bullet
6293 @item
6294 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6295 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6296 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6297 @item
6298 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6299 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6300 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6301 @item
6302 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6303 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6304 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6305 before applying the operator.
6306 @end itemize
6307
6308 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6309
6310 @itemize @bullet
6311 @item
6312 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6313 @item
6314 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6315 @item
6316 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
6317 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
6318 (after above conversions) is also a number when
6319 @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6320 but an absolute address otherwise.
6321 @item
6322 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6323 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6324 section as the relative operand(s).
6325 @item
6326 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6327 conversions) is an absolute address.
6328 @end itemize
6329
6330 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6331 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6332 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6333 section @samp{.data}:
6334 @smallexample
6335 SECTIONS
6336 @{
6337 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6338 @}
6339 @end smallexample
6340 @noindent
6341 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6342 @samp{.data} section.
6343
6344 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6345 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6346
6347 @node Builtin Functions
6348 @subsection Builtin Functions
6349 @cindex functions in expressions
6350 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6351 use in linker script expressions.
6352
6353 @table @code
6354 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6355 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6356 @cindex expression, absolute
6357 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6358 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6359 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6360 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6361
6362 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6363 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6364 @cindex section address in expression
6365 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6366 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6367 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6368 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6369 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6370 the other two will be absolute:
6371 @smallexample
6372 @group
6373 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6374 .output1 :
6375 @{
6376 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6377 @dots{}
6378 @}
6379 .output :
6380 @{
6381 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6382 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6383 @}
6384 @dots{} @}
6385 @end group
6386 @end smallexample
6387
6388 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6389 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6390 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6391 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6392 @cindex round up location counter
6393 @cindex align location counter
6394 @cindex round up expression
6395 @cindex align expression
6396 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6397 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6398 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6399 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6400 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6401 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6402
6403 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6404 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6405 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6406 input sections:
6407 @smallexample
6408 @group
6409 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6410 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6411 *(.data)
6412 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6413 @}
6414 @dots{} @}
6415 @end group
6416 @end smallexample
6417 @noindent
6418 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6419 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6420 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6421 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6422
6423 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6424
6425 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6426 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6427 @cindex section alignment
6428 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6429 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6430 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6431 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6432 value in that section.
6433 @smallexample
6434 @group
6435 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6436 .output @{
6437 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6438 @dots{}
6439 @}
6440 @dots{} @}
6441 @end group
6442 @end smallexample
6443
6444 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6445 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6446 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6447 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6448 section.
6449
6450 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6451 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6452 This is equivalent to either
6453 @smallexample
6454 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6455 @end smallexample
6456 or
6457 @smallexample
6458 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6459 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6460 @end smallexample
6461 @noindent
6462 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6463 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6464 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6465 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6466 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6467 bytes in the on-disk file.
6468
6469 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6470 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6471 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6472 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6473 running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6474 that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6475 page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
6476
6477 @noindent
6478 Example:
6479 @smallexample
6480 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6481 @end smallexample
6482
6483 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6484 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6485 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6486 evaluation purposes.
6487
6488 @smallexample
6489 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6490 @end smallexample
6491
6492 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6493 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6494 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6495 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6496 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6497 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6498 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6499 argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6500 script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6501 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6502 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6503 section alignment.
6504
6505 @smallexample
6506 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6507 @end smallexample
6508
6509 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6510 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6511 @cindex symbol defaults
6512 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6513 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6514 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6515 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6516 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6517 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6518 existed, its value is preserved:
6519
6520 @smallexample
6521 @group
6522 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6523 .text : @{
6524 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6525 @dots{}
6526 @}
6527 @dots{}
6528 @}
6529 @end group
6530 @end smallexample
6531
6532 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6533 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6534 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6535
6536 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6537 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6538 @cindex section load address in expression
6539 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6540 Section LMA}).
6541
6542 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6543 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6544 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6545 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6546
6547 @kindex MAX
6548 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6549 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6550
6551 @kindex MIN
6552 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6553 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6554
6555 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6556 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6557 @cindex unallocated address, next
6558 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6559 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6560 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6561 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6562
6563 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6564 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6565 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6566
6567 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6568 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6569 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6570 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6571 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6572 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6573 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6574 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6575 name.
6576
6577 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6578 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6579 @cindex section size
6580 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6581 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6582 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6583 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6584 @smallexample
6585 @group
6586 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6587 .output @{
6588 .start = . ;
6589 @dots{}
6590 .end = . ;
6591 @}
6592 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6593 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6594 @dots{} @}
6595 @end group
6596 @end smallexample
6597
6598 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6599 @itemx sizeof_headers
6600 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6601 @cindex header size
6602 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6603 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6604 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6605 choose, to facilitate paging.
6606
6607 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6608 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6609 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6610 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6611 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6612 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6613 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6614 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6615 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6616 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6617 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6618 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6619 @end table
6620
6621 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6622 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6623 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6624 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6625 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6626 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6627 linker will report an error.
6628
6629 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6630
6631 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6632 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6633 commands.
6634
6635 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6636 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6637 read. This can affect archive searching.
6638
6639 @ifset GENERIC
6640 @node Machine Dependent
6641 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6642
6643 @cindex machine dependencies
6644 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6645 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6646 functionality are not listed.
6647
6648 @menu
6649 @ifset H8300
6650 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6651 @end ifset
6652 @ifset M68HC11
6653 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6654 @end ifset
6655 @ifset ARM
6656 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6657 @end ifset
6658 @ifset HPPA
6659 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6660 @end ifset
6661 @ifset M68K
6662 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6663 @end ifset
6664 @ifset MIPS
6665 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6666 @end ifset
6667 @ifset MMIX
6668 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6669 @end ifset
6670 @ifset MSP430
6671 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6672 @end ifset
6673 @ifset NDS32
6674 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6675 @end ifset
6676 @ifset NIOSII
6677 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6678 @end ifset
6679 @ifset POWERPC
6680 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6681 @end ifset
6682 @ifset POWERPC64
6683 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6684 @end ifset
6685 @ifset S/390
6686 * S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6687 @end ifset
6688 @ifset SPU
6689 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6690 @end ifset
6691 @ifset TICOFF
6692 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6693 @end ifset
6694 @ifset WIN32
6695 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6696 @end ifset
6697 @ifset XTENSA
6698 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6699 @end ifset
6700 @end menu
6701 @end ifset
6702
6703 @ifset H8300
6704 @ifclear GENERIC
6705 @raisesections
6706 @end ifclear
6707
6708 @node H8/300
6709 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6710
6711 @cindex H8/300 support
6712 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6713 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6714
6715 @table @emph
6716 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6717 @item relaxing address modes
6718 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6719 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6720 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6721 respectively.
6722
6723 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6724 @item synthesizing instructions
6725 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6726 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6727 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6728 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6729 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6730 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6731 top page of memory).
6732
6733 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6734 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6735 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6736 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6737 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6738 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6739 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6740
6741 @item bit manipulation instructions
6742 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6743 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6744 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6745 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6746 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6747 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6748 the top page of memory).
6749
6750 @item system control instructions
6751 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6752 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6753 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6754 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6755 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6756 the top page of memory).
6757 @end table
6758
6759 @ifclear GENERIC
6760 @lowersections
6761 @end ifclear
6762 @end ifset
6763
6764 @ifclear GENERIC
6765 @ifset Renesas
6766 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6767 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6768 @node Renesas
6769 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6770
6771 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6772 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6773 options are required for these chips.
6774 @end ifset
6775 @end ifclear
6776
6777 @ifset ARM
6778 @ifclear GENERIC
6779 @raisesections
6780 @end ifclear
6781
6782 @ifset M68HC11
6783 @ifclear GENERIC
6784 @raisesections
6785 @end ifclear
6786
6787 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6788 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6789
6790 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6791
6792 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6793
6794 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6795 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6796
6797 @table @emph
6798 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6799 @item relaxing address modes
6800 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6801 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6802 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6803 respectively.
6804
6805 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6806 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6807 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6808
6809 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6810 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6811 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6812 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6813 @code{bset} instructions.
6814
6815 @end table
6816
6817 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6818
6819 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6820 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6821 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6822 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6823 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6824 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6825 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6826 point to the function trampoline.
6827
6828 @ifclear GENERIC
6829 @lowersections
6830 @end ifclear
6831 @end ifset
6832
6833 @node ARM
6834 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6835
6836 @cindex ARM interworking support
6837 @kindex --support-old-code
6838 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6839 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6840 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6841 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6842 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6843 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
6844 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6845 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6846 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6847 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6848
6849 @cindex thumb entry point
6850 @cindex entry point, thumb
6851 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6852 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6853 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6854 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6855 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6856 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6857
6858 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6859 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6860 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6861 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6862 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6863 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6864
6865 @cindex BE8
6866 @kindex --be8
6867 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6868 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6869 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6870 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6871 little-endian code.
6872
6873 @cindex TARGET1
6874 @kindex --target1-rel
6875 @kindex --target1-abs
6876 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6877 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6878 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6879 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6880
6881 @cindex TARGET2
6882 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6883 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6884 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6885 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6886 @table @samp
6887 @item rel
6888 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6889 @item abs
6890 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6891 @item got-rel
6892 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6893 @end table
6894
6895 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6896 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6897 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6898 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6899 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6900 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6901
6902 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6903 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6904 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6905
6906 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6907 relocations are ignored.
6908
6909 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6910 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6911 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6912 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6913
6914 @smallexample
6915 TST rM, #1
6916 MOVEQ PC, rM
6917 BX Rn
6918 @end smallexample
6919
6920 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6921 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6922 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6923
6924 @cindex USE_BLX
6925 @kindex --use-blx
6926 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6927 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6928 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6929 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6930 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6931
6932 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6933 specify it if you are using that target.
6934
6935 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6936 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6937 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6938 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6939 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6940 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6941 the support code can read the intended values.
6942
6943 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6944 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6945 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6946 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6947 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6948 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6949
6950 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6951 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6952 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6953 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6954 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6955 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6956
6957 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6958 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6959 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6960 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6961 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6962 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6963 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6964
6965 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6966 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6967 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6968 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6969 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6970 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6971 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6972
6973 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6974 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6975 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6976
6977 @cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6978 @kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6979
6980 The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6981 workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6982 the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6983 off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6984 the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6985 core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6986 integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6987 VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6988
6989 The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6990 necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6991
6992 The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6993 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6994 STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6995 linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6996 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6997
6998 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6999 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7000 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
7001 replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
7002 branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
7003 then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
7004
7005 The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
7006 the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
7007
7008 The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
7009 they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
7010 there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7011 occurs.
7012
7013 The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
7014 PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
7015 large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
7016 cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7017 occurs.
7018
7019 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
7020 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
7021 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7022 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7023 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7024 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
7025 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
7026 not be diagnosed.
7027
7028 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
7029 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
7030 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7031 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7032 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7033 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
7034 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
7035
7036 @cindex PIC_VENEER
7037 @kindex --pic-veneer
7038 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
7039 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
7040 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
7041 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
7042
7043 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
7044 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7045 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
7046 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
7047 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7048 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
7049 controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
7050 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
7051 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
7052 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7053 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7054 where they should be placed.
7055
7056 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7057 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
7058 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
7059 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7060 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7061 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7062 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7063 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7064 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7065 from the input sections.
7066
7067 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7068 @samp{N = +1}.
7069
7070 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7071 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7072 otherwise.
7073
7074 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7075 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7076 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7077 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7078
7079 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7080
7081 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7082 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7083 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7084 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7085
7086 Please contact ARM for further details.
7087
7088 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7089 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7090 @cindex Merging exidx entries
7091 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7092
7093 @kindex --long-plt
7094 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7095 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7096 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7097 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7098
7099 @kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7100 @cindex AArch64 rela addend
7101 The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7102 link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7103
7104 @cindex Placement of SG veneers
7105 All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7106 Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
7107 @samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7108 veneers in memory.
7109
7110 @kindex --cmse-implib
7111 @cindex Secure gateway import library
7112 The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7113 specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7114 secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7115 executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7116
7117 @kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7118 @cindex Input import library
7119 The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7120 must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7121 given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7122 in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7123 @samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7124 library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7125 library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7126 for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7127 specified.
7128
7129 @ifclear GENERIC
7130 @lowersections
7131 @end ifclear
7132 @end ifset
7133
7134 @ifset HPPA
7135 @ifclear GENERIC
7136 @raisesections
7137 @end ifclear
7138
7139 @node HPPA ELF32
7140 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7141 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7142 @kindex --multi-subspace
7143 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7144 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7145 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7146 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7147 multiple sub-spaces.
7148
7149 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
7150 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7151 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7152 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7153 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7154 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7155 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7156 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7157 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7158 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7159 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7160 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7161 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7162 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7163 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7164 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7165
7166 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7167 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7168 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7169 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7170
7171 @ifclear GENERIC
7172 @lowersections
7173 @end ifclear
7174 @end ifset
7175
7176 @ifset M68K
7177 @ifclear GENERIC
7178 @raisesections
7179 @end ifclear
7180
7181 @node M68K
7182 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7183
7184 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7185 @kindex --got=@var{type}
7186 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7187 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7188 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7189 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7190 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7191 entries only at non-negative offsets.
7192 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7193 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7194 support such GOTs.
7195 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7196 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7197 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7198 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7199
7200 @ifclear GENERIC
7201 @lowersections
7202 @end ifclear
7203 @end ifset
7204
7205 @ifset MIPS
7206 @ifclear GENERIC
7207 @raisesections
7208 @end ifclear
7209
7210 @node MIPS
7211 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7212
7213 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7214 @kindex --insn32
7215 @kindex --no-insn32
7216 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7217 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7218 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7219 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7220 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7221 including 16-bit ones where possible.
7222
7223 @cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7224 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7225 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7226 The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7227 control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7228 @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7229 relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7230 calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7231 relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7232 instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7233 or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7234 the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7235
7236 @ifclear GENERIC
7237 @lowersections
7238 @end ifclear
7239 @end ifset
7240
7241 @ifset MMIX
7242 @ifclear GENERIC
7243 @raisesections
7244 @end ifclear
7245
7246 @node MMIX
7247 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
7248 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7249 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7250 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7251 can translate between the two formats.
7252
7253 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7254 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7255 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7256 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7257 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7258 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7259 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7260 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7261
7262 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7263 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7264 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7265 of a section.
7266
7267 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7268 are left out from an mmo file.
7269
7270 @ifclear GENERIC
7271 @lowersections
7272 @end ifclear
7273 @end ifset
7274
7275 @ifset MSP430
7276 @ifclear GENERIC
7277 @raisesections
7278 @end ifclear
7279
7280 @node MSP430
7281 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
7282 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7283 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7284 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7285
7286 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
7287 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7288
7289 @table @code
7290 @item @samp{.vectors}
7291 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7292
7293 @item @samp{.bootloader}
7294 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7295 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7296
7297 @item @samp{.infomem}
7298 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7299 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7300
7301 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
7302 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7303 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7304
7305 @item @samp{.noinit}
7306 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7307
7308 The last two sections are used by gcc.
7309 @end table
7310
7311 @table @option
7312 @cindex MSP430 Options
7313 @kindex --code-region
7314 @item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7315 This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7316 argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7317 using this option.
7318
7319 @kindex --data-region
7320 @item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7321 This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7322 [either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7323 for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7324
7325 @kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7326 @item --disable-sec-transformation
7327 Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7328 and @code{--data-region} options.
7329 This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7330 wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7331 not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7332 @end table
7333
7334 @ifclear GENERIC
7335 @lowersections
7336 @end ifclear
7337 @end ifset
7338
7339 @ifset NDS32
7340 @ifclear GENERIC
7341 @raisesections
7342 @end ifclear
7343
7344 @node NDS32
7345 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
7346 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
7347 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7348 relaxes objects according to these options.
7349
7350 @table @code
7351 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7352 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7353
7354 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7355 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7356
7357 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7358 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7359
7360 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7361 Export the EX9 table after linking.
7362
7363 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7364 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7365
7366 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7367 Update the existing EX9 table.
7368
7369 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7370 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7371
7372 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7373 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7374
7375 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7376 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7377
7378 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7379 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7380 @end table
7381
7382 @ifclear GENERIC
7383 @lowersections
7384 @end ifclear
7385 @end ifset
7386
7387 @ifset NIOSII
7388 @ifclear GENERIC
7389 @raisesections
7390 @end ifclear
7391
7392 @node Nios II
7393 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7394 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
7395 @kindex --relax on Nios II
7396
7397 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7398 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7399 which may result in @command{ld} giving
7400 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7401 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7402 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7403 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7404 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7405 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7406 larger than 256MB.
7407
7408 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7409 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7410 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7411 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7412 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7413 register as a temporary.
7414
7415 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7416 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7417 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7418
7419 @ifclear GENERIC
7420 @lowersections
7421 @end ifclear
7422 @end ifset
7423
7424 @ifset POWERPC
7425 @ifclear GENERIC
7426 @raisesections
7427 @end ifclear
7428
7429 @node PowerPC ELF32
7430 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7431 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7432 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7433 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7434 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7435 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7436 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7437 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7438 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7439 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7440 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7441 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7442 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7443
7444 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7445 @table @option
7446 @cindex PowerPC PLT
7447 @kindex --bss-plt
7448 @item --bss-plt
7449 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7450 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7451 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7452 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7453 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7454 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7455 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7456 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7457
7458 @kindex --secure-plt
7459 @item --secure-plt
7460 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7461 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7462 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7463 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7464 style BSS PLT.
7465
7466 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7467 @kindex --sdata-got
7468 @item --sdata-got
7469 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7470 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7471 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7472 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7473 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7474 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7475 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7476 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7477 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7478 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7479 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7480 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7481
7482 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7483 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7484 @item --emit-stub-syms
7485 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7486 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7487
7488 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7489 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7490 @item --no-tls-optimize
7491 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7492 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7493 disable the optimization.
7494 @end table
7495
7496 @ifclear GENERIC
7497 @lowersections
7498 @end ifclear
7499 @end ifset
7500
7501 @ifset POWERPC64
7502 @ifclear GENERIC
7503 @raisesections
7504 @end ifclear
7505
7506 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7507 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7508
7509 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7510 @table @option
7511 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7512 @kindex --stub-group-size
7513 @item --stub-group-size
7514 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7515 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7516 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7517 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7518 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7519 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7520 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7521 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7522 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7523 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7524 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7525 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7526 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7527 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7528
7529 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7530 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7531 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7532 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7533
7534 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7535 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7536 @item --emit-stub-syms
7537 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7538 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7539
7540 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7541 @kindex --dotsyms
7542 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7543 @item --dotsyms
7544 @itemx --no-dotsyms
7545 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7546 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7547 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7548 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7549 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7550 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7551 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7552 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7553 feature.
7554
7555 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7556 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7557 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7558 @item --save-restore-funcs
7559 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7560 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7561 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7562 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7563 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7564 link.
7565
7566 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7567 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7568 @item --no-tls-optimize
7569 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7570 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7571 disable the optimization.
7572
7573 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7574 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7575 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7576 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7577 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7578 These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7579 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7580 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7581 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7582 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7583 option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7584 Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7585 slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7586 application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7587 normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7588
7589 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7590 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7591 @item --no-opd-optimize
7592 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7593 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7594 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7595 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7596
7597 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7598 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7599 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7600 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7601 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7602 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7603 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7604
7605 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7606 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7607 @item --no-toc-optimize
7608 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7609 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7610 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7611 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7612 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7613 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7614 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7615 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7616 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7617 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7618 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7619 optimization.
7620
7621 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7622 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7623 @item --no-multi-toc
7624 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7625 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7626 where TOC
7627 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7628 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7629 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7630 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7631 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7632 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7633 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7634 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7635
7636 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7637 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7638 @item --no-toc-sort
7639 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7640 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7641 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7642 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7643 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7644 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7645 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7646 off this feature.
7647
7648 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7649 @kindex --plt-align
7650 @kindex --no-plt-align
7651 @item --plt-align
7652 @itemx --no-plt-align
7653 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7654 aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7655 boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7656 specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7657 specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7658 if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7659 PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
7660
7661 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7662 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7663 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7664 @item --plt-static-chain
7665 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7666 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7667 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7668 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7669
7670 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7671 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7672 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7673 @item --plt-thread-safe
7674 @itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
7675 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7676 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7677 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7678 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7679 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7680 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7681 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7682 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7683 default behaviour.
7684
7685 @cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7686 @kindex --plt-localentry
7687 @kindex --no-plt-localentry
7688 @item --plt-localentry
7689 @itemx --no-localentry
7690 ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7691 ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7692 (the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7693 Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7694 or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7695 functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7696 in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
7697 interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7698 including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7699 to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7700 complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7701 care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
7702 @end table
7703
7704 @ifclear GENERIC
7705 @lowersections
7706 @end ifclear
7707 @end ifset
7708
7709 @ifset S/390
7710 @ifclear GENERIC
7711 @raisesections
7712 @end ifclear
7713
7714 @node S/390 ELF
7715 @section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7716
7717 @cindex S/390 ELF options
7718 @table @option
7719
7720 @cindex S/390
7721 @kindex --s390-pgste
7722 @item --s390-pgste
7723 This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7724 segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7725 binaries marked that way.
7726 @end table
7727
7728 @ifclear GENERIC
7729 @lowersections
7730 @end ifclear
7731 @end ifset
7732
7733 @ifset SPU
7734 @ifclear GENERIC
7735 @raisesections
7736 @end ifclear
7737
7738 @node SPU ELF
7739 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7740
7741 @cindex SPU ELF options
7742 @table @option
7743
7744 @cindex SPU plugins
7745 @kindex --plugin
7746 @item --plugin
7747 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7748
7749 @cindex SPU overlays
7750 @kindex --no-overlays
7751 @item --no-overlays
7752 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7753 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7754 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7755 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7756
7757 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7758 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7759 @item --emit-stub-syms
7760 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7761 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7762
7763 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7764 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7765 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7766 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7767 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7768 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7769
7770 @cindex SPU local store size
7771 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7772 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7773 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7774 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7775 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7776
7777 @cindex SPU
7778 @kindex --stack-analysis
7779 @item --stack-analysis
7780 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7781 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7782 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7783 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7784 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7785 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7786 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7787 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7788 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7789 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7790 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7791 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7792 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7793 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7794 and calls will be given.
7795
7796 @cindex SPU
7797 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7798 @item --emit-stack-syms
7799 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7800 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7801 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7802 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7803 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7804 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7805 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7806 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7807 @end table
7808
7809 @ifclear GENERIC
7810 @lowersections
7811 @end ifclear
7812 @end ifset
7813
7814 @ifset TICOFF
7815 @ifclear GENERIC
7816 @raisesections
7817 @end ifclear
7818
7819 @node TI COFF
7820 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7821 @cindex TI COFF versions
7822 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7823 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7824 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7825 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7826 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7827 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7828
7829 @ifclear GENERIC
7830 @lowersections
7831 @end ifclear
7832 @end ifset
7833
7834 @ifset WIN32
7835 @ifclear GENERIC
7836 @raisesections
7837 @end ifclear
7838
7839 @node WIN32
7840 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7841
7842 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7843 See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
7844 command-line options mentioned here.
7845
7846 @table @emph
7847 @cindex import libraries
7848 @item import libraries
7849 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7850 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7851 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7852 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7853 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7854 @samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
7855
7856 @item exporting DLL symbols
7857 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7858 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7859
7860 @table @emph
7861 @item using auto-export functionality
7862 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7863 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7864 which is controlled by the following command-line options:
7865
7866 @itemize
7867 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7868 @item --exclude-symbols
7869 @item --exclude-libs
7870 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7871 @item --version-script
7872 @end itemize
7873
7874 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7875 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7876 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7877 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7878 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7879 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7880 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7881 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7882
7883 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7884 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7885 if either of the following are true:
7886
7887 @itemize
7888 @item A DEF file is used.
7889 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7890 @end itemize
7891
7892 @item using a DEF file
7893 @cindex using a DEF file
7894 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7895 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7896 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7897 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7898 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7899
7900 @example
7901 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7902 @end example
7903
7904 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7905 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7906
7907 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7908
7909 @example
7910 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7911
7912 EXPORTS
7913 foo
7914 bar
7915 _bar = bar
7916 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7917 var1 DATA
7918 doo = foo == foo2
7919 eoo DATA == var1
7920 @end example
7921
7922 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7923 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7924 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7925 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7926 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7927 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7928 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7929 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7930 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7931
7932 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7933 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7934 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7935
7936 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7937 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7938 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7939 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7940
7941 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7942 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7943 non-default base address for the image.
7944
7945 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7946 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7947 filename specified on the command line.
7948
7949 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7950
7951 @example
7952 EXPORTS
7953 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7954 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7955 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7956 @end example
7957
7958 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7959 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7960 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7961 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7962 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7963 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7964 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7965
7966 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7967
7968 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7969 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7970 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7971 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7972 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7973
7974 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7975 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7976 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7977 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7978
7979 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7980 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7981 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7982 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7983 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7984 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7985 application will behave unexpectedly.
7986
7987 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7988 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7989 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7990 API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7991 the DLL without an import library.
7992
7993 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7994 other DEF file statements
7995
7996 @cindex creating a DEF file
7997 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7998 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
7999
8000 @item Using decorations
8001 @cindex Using decorations
8002 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
8003 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
8004 declared as:
8005
8006 @example
8007 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
8008 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
8009 @end example
8010
8011 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
8012 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
8013 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
8014 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8015
8016 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
8017 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
8018 instead:
8019
8020 @example
8021 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
8022 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
8023 @end example
8024
8025 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
8026 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
8027 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
8028 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
8029 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
8030 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
8031 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
8032 information.
8033 @end table
8034
8035 @cindex automatic data imports
8036 @item automatic data imports
8037 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
8038 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
8039 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
8040 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
8041 code to these platforms, especially for large
8042 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
8043 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
8044 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
8045 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
8046 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
8047 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
8048 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
8049 trigger the feature's use.
8050
8051 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
8052 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8053
8054 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
8055 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8056
8057 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8058 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8059 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
8060 below.
8061
8062 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
8063 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8064 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8065 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8066 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8067 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
8068 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
8069 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
8070 references.
8071
8072 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8073 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8074 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8075 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8076 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8077 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
8078 run without error on an older system.
8079
8080 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8081 enabled as needed.
8082
8083 @cindex direct linking to a dll
8084 @item direct linking to a dll
8085 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8086 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
8087 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
8088 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
8089 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8090 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8091 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
8092 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
8093 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
8094 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8095
8096 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
8097 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
8098 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
8099 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8100 select the dll instead of an import library.
8101
8102
8103 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8104 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
8105
8106 @example
8107 libxxx.dll.a
8108 xxx.dll.a
8109 libxxx.a
8110 xxx.lib
8111 libxxx.lib
8112 cygxxx.dll (*)
8113 libxxx.dll
8114 xxx.dll
8115 @end example
8116
8117 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8118
8119 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8120 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8121 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8122 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
8123 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8124
8125 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8126 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
8127 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8128 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8129 could coexist on the same machine.
8130
8131 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8132 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
8133 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
8134
8135 @example
8136 bin/
8137 cygxxx.dll
8138 lib/
8139 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
8140 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
8141 @end example
8142
8143 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8144 done two ways:
8145
8146 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8147 @example
8148 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
8149 @end example
8150
8151 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8152 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8153 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8154 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8155
8156 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8157 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8158 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8159 making the app/dll.
8160
8161 @example
8162 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
8163 @end example
8164
8165 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8166
8167 @example
8168 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
8169 @end example
8170
8171 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8172 perfectly legal
8173
8174 @example
8175 bin/
8176 cygxxx-5.dll
8177 lib/
8178 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
8179 @end example
8180
8181 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
8182 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8183 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8184
8185 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
8186 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
8187
8188 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8189 work with auto-imported data.
8190
8191 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8192 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8193 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8194 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8195 possible to do this without an import lib.
8196
8197 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8198 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8199 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8200 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8201
8202 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
8203 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8204 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8205 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
8206 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8207 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8208 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
8209
8210 @item symbol aliasing
8211 @table @emph
8212 @item adding additional names
8213 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
8214 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8215 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8216 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
8217 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
8218
8219 @example
8220 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8221
8222 EXPORTS
8223 foo
8224 _foo = foo
8225 @end example
8226
8227 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8228
8229 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8230 source code using the "weak" attribute:
8231
8232 @example
8233 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
8234 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
8235 @end example
8236
8237 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8238 symbols.
8239
8240 @item renaming symbols
8241 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
8242 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
8243 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8244 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
8245 created). In the following example:
8246
8247 @example
8248 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8249
8250 EXPORTS
8251 _foo = foo
8252 @end example
8253
8254 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8255 @samp{_foo}.
8256 @end table
8257
8258 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
8259 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
8260 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
8261 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8262 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8263 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8264 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8265 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8266 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8267 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
8268 which is probably not what you wanted.
8269
8270 @cindex weak externals
8271 @item weak externals
8272 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8273 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8274 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8275 are three variants of weak externals:
8276 @itemize
8277 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8278 called lazy externals.
8279 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8280 This form is not presently implemented.
8281 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8282 implemented.
8283 @end itemize
8284 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8285 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8286 uses a default value.
8287
8288 @cindex aligned common symbols
8289 @item aligned common symbols
8290 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8291 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8292 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8293 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8294 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8295 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8296 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8297 warnings about unknown linker directives.
8298
8299 @end table
8300
8301 @ifclear GENERIC
8302 @lowersections
8303 @end ifclear
8304 @end ifset
8305
8306 @ifset XTENSA
8307 @ifclear GENERIC
8308 @raisesections
8309 @end ifclear
8310
8311 @node Xtensa
8312 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8313
8314 @cindex Xtensa processors
8315 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8316 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8317 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8318 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8319 example, with the command:
8320
8321 @smallexample
8322 SECTIONS
8323 @{
8324 .text : @{
8325 *(.literal .text)
8326 @}
8327 @}
8328 @end smallexample
8329
8330 @noindent
8331 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8332 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8333 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8334 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8335 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8336 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8337 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
8338
8339 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
8340 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
8341 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8342 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8343 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8344 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8345 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8346 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8347 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8348 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8349 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8350 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8351
8352 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8353 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8354 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8355 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8356 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8357 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8358 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8359 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8360 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8361 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8362 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8363 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8364 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8365 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8366
8367 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8368 control the linker:
8369
8370 @cindex Xtensa options
8371 @table @option
8372 @item --size-opt
8373 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8374 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8375 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8376 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8377 preserve the correctness of the code.
8378 @end table
8379
8380 @ifclear GENERIC
8381 @lowersections
8382 @end ifclear
8383 @end ifset
8384
8385 @ifclear SingleFormat
8386 @node BFD
8387 @chapter BFD
8388
8389 @cindex back end
8390 @cindex object file management
8391 @cindex object formats available
8392 @kindex objdump -i
8393 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8394 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8395 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8396 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8397 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8398 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8399 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8400 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8401 list all the formats available for your configuration.
8402
8403 @cindex BFD requirements
8404 @cindex requirements for BFD
8405 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8406 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8407 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8408 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8409 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8410 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8411 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8412
8413 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8414 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8415 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8416 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8417
8418 @menu
8419 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8420 @end menu
8421
8422 @node BFD outline
8423 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8424 @cindex opening object files
8425 @include bfdsumm.texi
8426 @end ifclear
8427
8428 @node Reporting Bugs
8429 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8430 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8431 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8432
8433 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8434
8435 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8436 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8437 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8438 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8439 @command{ld}.
8440
8441 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8442 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8443
8444 @menu
8445 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8446 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8447 @end menu
8448
8449 @node Bug Criteria
8450 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8451 @cindex bug criteria
8452
8453 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8454
8455 @itemize @bullet
8456 @cindex fatal signal
8457 @cindex linker crash
8458 @cindex crash of linker
8459 @item
8460 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8461 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8462
8463 @cindex error on valid input
8464 @item
8465 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8466
8467 @cindex invalid input
8468 @item
8469 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8470 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8471 object files are correct.
8472
8473 @item
8474 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8475 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8476 @end itemize
8477
8478 @node Bug Reporting
8479 @section How to Report Bugs
8480 @cindex bug reports
8481 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8482
8483 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8484 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8485 recommend you contact that organization first.
8486
8487 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8488 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8489 distribution.
8490
8491 @ifset BUGURL
8492 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8493 @value{BUGURL}.
8494 @end ifset
8495
8496 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8497 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8498 fact or leave it out, state it!
8499
8500 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8501 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8502 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8503 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8504 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8505 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8506 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8507 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8508 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8509 and the most helpful.
8510
8511 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8512 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8513 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8514
8515 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8516 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8517 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8518 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8519
8520 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8521
8522 @itemize @bullet
8523 @item
8524 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8525 the @samp{--version} argument.
8526
8527 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8528 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8529
8530 @item
8531 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8532 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8533
8534 @item
8535 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8536 version number.
8537
8538 @item
8539 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8540 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8541
8542 @item
8543 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8544 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8545 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8546 sufficient.
8547
8548 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8549 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8550
8551 @item
8552 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8553 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8554 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8555 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8556 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8557 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8558 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8559 attachments are best.
8560
8561 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8562 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8563 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8564 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8565 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8566
8567 @item
8568 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8569 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8570
8571 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8572 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8573 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8574 a chance to make a mistake.
8575
8576 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8577 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8578 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8579 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8580 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8581 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8582 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8583 any conclusion from our observations.
8584
8585 @item
8586 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8587 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8588 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8589 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8590 context, not by line number.
8591
8592 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8593 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8594 @end itemize
8595
8596 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8597
8598 @itemize @bullet
8599 @item
8600 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8601
8602 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8603 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8604 changes will not affect it.
8605
8606 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8607 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8608 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8609 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8610
8611 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8612 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8613 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8614 less time, and so on.
8615
8616 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8617 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8618
8619 @item
8620 A patch for the bug.
8621
8622 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8623 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8624 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8625 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8626
8627 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8628 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8629 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8630 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8631 fixed.
8632
8633 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8634 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8635 help us to understand.
8636
8637 @item
8638 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8639
8640 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8641 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8642 @end itemize
8643
8644 @node MRI
8645 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8646 @cindex MRI compatibility
8647 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8648 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8649 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8650 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8651 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8652 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8653 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8654
8655 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8656 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8657 features to make use of them.
8658
8659 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8660 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8661
8662 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8663 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8664 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8665 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8666 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8667
8668 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8669
8670 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8671 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8672 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8673
8674 @table @code
8675 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8676 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8677 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8678 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8679 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8680 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8681 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8682 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8683 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8684 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8685 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8686
8687 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8688 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8689 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8690 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8691
8692 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8693
8694 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8695 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8696 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8697 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8698
8699 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8700 @item BASE @var{expression}
8701 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8702 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8703
8704 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8705 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8706 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8707 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8708
8709 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8710 @item END
8711 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8712
8713 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8714 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8715 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8716 language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8717
8718 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8719 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8720 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8721 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8722
8723 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8724 same line, with no change in its effect.
8725
8726 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8727 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8728 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8729 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8730 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8731 command line.
8732
8733 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8734 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8735 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8736 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8737 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8738
8739 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8740 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8741 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8742 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8743 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8744 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8745 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8746 file, in the order specified.
8747
8748 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8749 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8750 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8751 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8752 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8753 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8754
8755 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8756 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8757 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8758 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8759 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8760 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8761 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8762 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8763 @end table
8764
8765 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8766 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8767 @include fdl.texi
8768
8769 @node LD Index
8770 @unnumbered LD Index
8771
8772 @printindex cp
8773
8774 @tex
8775 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8776 % meantime:
8777 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8778 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8779 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8780 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8781 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8782 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8783 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8784 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8785 \page\colophon
8786 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8787 @end tex
8788
8789 @bye
This page took 0.381104 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.